JP2023063567A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of increasing game amusement.

SOLUTION: While a shift to a pseudo bonus state does not occur in a first section, a shift to the pseudo bonus state may occur in a second section. When the remaining number of continuous games is "0", the pseudo bonus state is completed. When an addition period is reached in the pseudo bonus state, the number of additional games for increasing the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state is imparted to each game. In the additional period, an additional performance corresponding thereto is executed. When a game in a CB state or a game with the bet number of "2" is executed in the additional period, the progress of the additional period is stopped but the progress of the additional performance is not stopped. In this case, the game in which the bet number is "3" in a non-CB state is executed thereafter, so that the additional performance is completed in a situation where the additional period continues.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2014-045989 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 includes advantageous transition means for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player;
addition means for executing an addition process for increasing the number of games to be played until the advantageous gaming state ends in the advantageous gaming state;
with
The addition means can execute the addition processing in the target game, and does not execute the addition processing in the non-target game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized through the display window; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; (a) It is a front view of a common display area, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on a combined display part. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device and the display content of the stop order on the combined display unit; FIG. 1 is an electrical configuration diagram of a slot machine; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the start waiting process performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing bet handling processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a setting process at the time of start executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a lottery process for a winning combination executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination lottery table when betting 3 coins; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination lottery table when two cards are bet; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order in which the reels are stopped and the winning mode to be established; 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a corresponding process at the end of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game state and the game section that exist in the slot machine. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the first section and the second section, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each game state in the second section. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB combination and the second CB combination, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB state and the second CB state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for CB performed by main side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the game state shifts to the CB state and how the shift to the CB state is restricted. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of notification related to winning states of the first CB and second CB hands. (a) to (j) are time charts showing how various notifications are executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of game media bet. It is a flowchart which shows the internal information control processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing at the time of the supply start performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for non-internal medium information performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st CB inside information processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 2nd CB internal middle alerting|reporting performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a storage area of a main RAM; (a) It is a flowchart which shows the all clear processing performed by the main side MPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the partial clear processing which is performed by the main side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how partial clear processing and full clear processing are executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing ending handling processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing advantageous lottery processing at the start of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by main side MPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the image display device when the first start command is received; (b) is for explaining the display content of the image display device when the second start command is received; is an explanatory diagram of . (a) to (g) are time charts showing how a transition to a pseudo-bonus state occurs. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state in which it is notified that the first stop is the left reel when the winning is made with the index value IV=10; (b) with the index value IV=10; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which it is notified that the first stop is the right reel when winning is won; (a) A flowchart showing a stop order notification control process executed by the main MPU, and (b) a flowchart showing a winning determination process executed by the main MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the normal production|presentation control processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (i) are time charts showing how various effects are executed during the transition standby period. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing pseudo-bonus processing at the start of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus process executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for pseudo bonuses performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for an addition performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for production|presentation side addition periods performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the pseudo-bonus state progresses. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution content of the end effect in the image display device, and is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution content of the resurrection effect in the image display device. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how an increase in the number of games occurs and how an increase in the number of games is notified during the additional period. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination of symbols for establishing the first CB prize and the combination of symbols for establishing the second CB prize in the second embodiment; It is a time chart showing the flow of the game when winning . It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus process executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the second section progresses. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a combination lottery process executed by the main MPU in the fourth embodiment; FIG. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination lottery table when betting 3 coins, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination of symbols that establishes the 10th compensation winning prize. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination lottery table when two cards are bet; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order in which the reels are stopped and the winning mode to be established; It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the transition to the second section occurs. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the type of game state and the transition mode of the game state in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing advantageous lottery processing at the start of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus process executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) to (f) are time charts showing game state transitions. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the operation of the reels when a special bell prize is established in the sixth embodiment.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. A plurality of wooden panels are fixed to the housing 11 so that the housing 11 is formed into a box-like shape that is open forward as a whole.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 as shown in FIGS. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with a shaft portion 15 provided on the left side of the housing 11 as a rotation axis. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the rear side thereof.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the upper center portion of the front door 12 . The game panel 20 has three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M and 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and the reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that its center axis coincides with the rotation axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R one-to-one. there is Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected through the respective display windows 21L, 21M, 21R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20 as shown in FIG. When the start lever 41 is operated when a predetermined number or more of game media, which are either medals or virtual medals, have been bet, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The respective stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively. Each of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44 is in a state in which it can be stopped after a predetermined time has passed since the left reel 32L started rotating.

The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44. One game (game cycle) is performed until the execution of various processes such as the granting of and the management of the game state is completed.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 when reception is permitted, and are guided to the hopper device 53 when reception is prohibited. The medals are led to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal discharge port 58 provided in the front lower portion of the front door 12 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a prize corresponding to the awarding of game media is established on the main line ML, which will be described later. have. Below the medal slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided to be pushed when the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 52. As shown in FIG.

On the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R are a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be betted at once, and a button for inserting two virtual medals at once. A second credit input button 48 is provided. In this slot machine 10, there are situations where the number of game media (medals or virtual medals) that can be betted (that is, bet setting) at one time is "3" and "2".

The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and three or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of decreasing the number of virtual medals by three. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "2", and one or more virtual tokens are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one.

If the number of stored virtual medals is less than the difference between the current bet number and the bettable number, and the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, the bet number will be the number of virtual medals. The number of virtual medals is increased, and the number of virtual medals becomes zero.

The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one.

When the second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of stored virtual medals is one and the current bet number is "0", the bet number will be "1". At the same time, the number of virtual medals becomes zero.

The first credit insertion button 47 has a wider pressing surface than the second credit insertion button 48 when the player operates the button. Thereby, the operability of the first credit insertion button 47 is enhanced.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41 . The slot machine 10 has a credit function of accumulating and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement button 51 is operated under the condition that the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 58 as real medals.

A power supply device 54 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 53 as shown in FIGS. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a set value of the slot machine 10 from "1" to "6". , a setting key insertion hole 57 into which a setting key owned by the manager of the game hall is inserted and operated is provided.

Next, the symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 4 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, numbers "0" to "20" are assigned to the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are visible from the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R of the main controller 70, which will be described later. It is a number for recognizing the symbol in a state of being in a bad state, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (eg, 20th on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (eg, 19th on the left reel 32L), a “watermelon” symbol (eg, 18th on the left reel 32L), and “ Red 7" symbol (e.g., 15th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of various symbols are different for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIG. 5 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R. Each of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect positions where symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started to rotate in a state where a predetermined number or more of game media are betted, and when a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of giving the game media. , the benefit of replaying, or the transition of the game state.

That is, in the present slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which winning can be established. The main line ML is set as a straight line. Therefore, a subline SL1 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R. A subline SL3 connecting a connected subline SL2, a lower pattern of the left reel 32L, a lower pattern of the middle reel 32M, and a lower pattern of the right reel 32R, a lower pattern of the left reel 32L, a middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R. Winning is not established even if a winning combination is established on a straight line such as a sub-line SL4 connecting the upper symbols of .

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning.

The small winnings to which the game media are given include the first compensation winning, the second compensation winning, the third compensation winning, the fourth compensation winning, the fifth compensation winning, the sixth compensation winning, the seventh compensation winning, and the eighth compensation winning. There are supplemental prizes, ninth supplementary prizes, first bell prizes, second bell prizes, special bell prizes, first watermelon prizes, second watermelon prizes and cherry prizes. Specifically, in the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" symbol, It will be the first supplementary prize. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the second compensation winning prize becomes. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the third compensation winning prize becomes. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the fourth supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "BAR" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the fifth supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "BAR" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Bell" symbol, the sixth supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" symbol, the seventh compensation winning prize becomes. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the eighth compensation winning prize becomes. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the ninth compensation prize is won. becomes. If any one of the first to ninth supplementary prizes is won, the number of game media to be awarded becomes “1”.

On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, on the main line ML. , the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" symbol, the left reel on the main line ML. When the stopped symbol of 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol of the right reel 32R is a "red 7" symbol, or the left reel 32L is on the main line ML. is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol of the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, the first bell wins. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second bell wins. becomes. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" symbol, special Winning a bell. If any of the first bell winning, second bell winning and special bell winning is achieved, the number of game media to be given becomes "15".

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML, the first watermelon wins. becomes. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the second watermelon wins. becomes. When either the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize is won, the number of game media to be given becomes “5”. When the stopped symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "cherry" symbol, the cherry prize is won regardless of whether the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is. In the case of winning a cherry prize, the number of game media to be given becomes “2”.

Winnings that give the privilege of replaying the next game without betting game media include normal replay winnings, first chance replay winnings, and second chance replay winnings. Specifically, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, It usually becomes a replay prize. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first chance replay. Win a prize. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second chance replay. Win a prize.

If any of the above replay wins are made, a replay privilege is given that allows the player to play the next game without betting the game medium. Specifically, if any of the replay wins in the game in which "3" game media are betted, the betting of the game media is not required, and the next game is started with the "3" game media being betted. A game can be started. In addition, if any of the replay wins in the game in which the game medium "2" is betted, the play of the next game is started with the game medium "2" betted, while the game medium is not required to be wagered. It becomes possible to

A first CB prize and a second CB prize are available as state transition prizes in which only game state transitions are performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol. In that case, it will be the 1st CB prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "WHITE 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "WHITE 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the second CB. Win a prize. When the first CB prize is established, the game state shifts to the first CB state, and when the second CB prize is established, the game state shifts to the second CB state.

The 1st CB state and the 2nd CB state are game states in which when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning of a minor combination is stopped on the main line ML, medals are paid out as winning regardless of whether there is a winning combination. For example, even if the win flag corresponding to the first bell win is not set to "1", if the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell win stops on the main line ML, the game medium will be sent to the player. Granted. On the other hand, the replay winning prize is established on the condition that the corresponding combination is won in the lottery.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, reel control different from that in the non-CB state is performed. In the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled so that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. In other words, in the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to be stopped within a specified time (190 msec) after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. On the other hand, in the first CB state and the second CB state, the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are controlled as described above, that is, the same reel control as in the normal game, but the left reel 32L is not controlled. As for the left reel 32L, reel control is performed such that the left reel 32L is slid only up to one symbol after the left stop button 42 is operated. That is, in the first CB state and the second CB state, the left reel 32L is reel-controlled to stop within a specified time (75 msec) shorter than the specified time after the left stop button 42 is operated.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, the reel control that slips only up to one symbol is not limited to the left reel 32L, and the reel corresponding to the stop button that was operated first has a maximum of one symbol. Control may be performed such that the reel is slipped only up to the predetermined reel, or reel control may be performed such that only a predetermined reel is slipped by a maximum of one symbol. Further, the stop button operated in a certain order is controlled such that the reel corresponding to the stop button operated second or the stop button operated last is controlled to slide only up to one symbol. Reel control may be performed such that the reel corresponding to the .

In the 1st CB state and the 2nd CB state, if the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning prize is won, the replay winning prize is given priority, and if the replay winning prize is not possible, the first bell winning can be established. Also, the first bell winning can be established even when the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning has not been won.

Both the first CB state and the second CB state are game states in which the game media owned by the player are not increased. Furthermore, in both the first CB state and the second CB state, the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state is greater than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. It is a game state in which the Details of these first CB state and second CB state will be described later.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

Above the front door 12, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, light emission of the upper lamp 61 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and light emission is controlled in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light emission effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair of left and right speakers, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the sound output is controlled so that a sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and a sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that Further, the speaker 62 is controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is controlled to display on the display surface images corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game. That is, the image display device 63 executes a display effect.

On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of stored virtual medals, and a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of virtual medals to be awarded when a small winning combination is won. When the number of game media is displayed and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported on the image display device 63, the display corresponding to the notified contents is performed, and furthermore, the management result of the game history is reported. and a section display section 67 for displaying a display corresponding to the fact that the game section is the second section. The credit display section 65 is composed of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a monochromatic LED such as green.

FIG. 7A is a front view of a common display area 68 provided with a combined display section 66 and a section display section 67. FIG. In the common display area 68, as shown in FIG. 7(a), a shared display section 66 in which two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are arranged side by side, and a section display section consisting of one light emitting section. 67 are aggregated.

Any of the small winning prizes corresponding to the provision of game media (1st to 9th supplemental winnings, 1st bell winning, 2nd bell winning, special bell winning, 1st watermelon winning, 2nd watermelon winning or cherry winning) When established, the number of given game media corresponding to the minor winning combination is displayed on the combined display section 66 at the end of the game in which the minor winning combination has been established. Specifically, when any one of the first to ninth compensation winnings is established in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "1" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. By being displayed, it is notified that the game media of "1" have been awarded. When any one of the first bell winning, second bell winning and special bell winning is established in the non-CB state, "1" is displayed on the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b. By displaying "5", it is notified that "15" game media have been awarded. Further, when either the first watermelon winning prize or the second watermelon winning prize is established in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. By doing so, it is notified that "5" game media have been provided. In addition, when a cherry prize is won in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden, and '2' is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b, whereby the game medium of '2' is displayed. is given.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, the number of game media awarded for winning a small winning combination is "1", as will be described later in detail. Therefore, when a small winning combination is established in the first CB state or the second CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "1" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. It is notified that the game media of "1" have been provided.

On the other hand, even if a winning such as a replay winning or a CB winning that does not give a game medium is established, the display corresponding to the winning is not displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. The 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in a non-display state. The display of the number of given game media on the dual-use display unit 66 is ended when the game media are betted to start the next game after the game in which the display is performed, and each 7-segment display is displayed at this bet timing. The devices 66a and 66b are in a non-display state.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported on the image display device 63, information corresponding to the reported stop order is displayed on the combined display section 66. FIG. FIG. 7(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the dual-use display section 66. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7B, in the slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order indicated by the image display device 63. The first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop is the middle reel. 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop. is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is The stop order is the left reel 32L, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop. The stop order where the second stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the stop order where the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are optional, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest are There is a stop order that is arbitrary and a stop order where the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary.

The notification of the stop order on the image display device 63 is made when a winning combination including the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth complementary winning data is won in the winning lottery process in the non-CB state. It can be executed when winning a role that includes 2 bell winning data and any of the 7th to 9th complementary winning data, or when winning a role that includes 1st bell winning data and special bell winning data. . Specifically, when winning a combination that includes the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth complementary winning data, the reel 32L is selected in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. , 32M, and 32R are stopped, the first bell winning is established, and if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the order of stopping corresponding to the winning combination of this time, the first to sixth compensation winnings are established. Either can be established. When the first bell win is established, as already explained, "15" game media are given to the player. of game media is given to the player.

When a winning combination including the second bell winning data and any of the seventh to ninth complementary winning data is won, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are played in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the order of stopping corresponding to the winning combination of this time, any one of the seventh to ninth complementary winnings is established. obtain. When the second bell win is established, as already explained, "15" game media are given to the player. of game media is given to the player.

When winning a combination including the first bell winning data and special bell winning data, when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the stop order in which the left reel 32L is stopped first among the above stop orders. If the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the stopping order in which the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped first, the first bell winning or the special bell winning is established. When the first bell win or the special bell win is established, the game medium of "15" is provided to the player as already explained.

When any one of the stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a of the dual-use display unit 66 is maintained in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b is maintained. , a display corresponding to the stop order of the notification targets is performed. The contents of this display are as shown in FIG. 7(b), and the display contents of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 are set in one-to-one correspondence with the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of display contents on the dual-purpose display unit 66 are set so as to correspond to part or all of the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63. good too.

The display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display portion 66 differs from the display content to be displayed when the dual-purpose display portion 66 displays a display corresponding to the provision of game media. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the dual-use display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media provided or to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the content of notification of the order of stopping on the image display device 63 and the content of display of the order of stopping on the dual-use display section 66. FIG.

When the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and image display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in each of the unit display images G1 to G3. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8(a) shows how the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The left unit display image G1 displays an image "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, and the middle unit display image G2 displays an image "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M. , an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image G3.

While the image display device 63 displays an image notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, the combined display unit 66 displays the reels as shown in FIG. 8(b). An "L" is displayed corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R. That is, in the image display device 63, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed in the stopping order. While the corresponding image display is performed, the combined display section 66 performs display irrelevant to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the display contents on the image display device 63 even if the display corresponding to the notification contents of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed on the combined display section 66 .

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63 . Also from this point, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66 compared to the image display device 63 . In addition, the dual-purpose display section 66 is located on the side opposite to the image display device 63 with the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible. As a result, the combined display section 66 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the image display device 63 , and this also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display section 66 .

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63 This display is started after the winning lottery process is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is validated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started earlier than the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63. However, these displays may start at the same time or substantially at the same time, and the display start order may be reversed. The display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a stop command for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which the display is executed. is terminated when

The shared display section 66 is arranged on the central side of the common display area 68 , while the section display section 67 is arranged on the corner side of the common display area 68 . The section display section 67 is a display section for notifying that the game section is the second section of the first section and the second section. The second section refers to reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable establishment of a winning advantageous to the player when a winning combination to be established is different according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. By notifying the stop order, the expected acquisition value of game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media betted in one game" from the "expected number of game media awarded in one game") becomes 1 or more. It is a section in which an advantageous gaming state (specifically, a pseudo-bonus state) can be started and a section in which the advantageous gaming state can be continued. On the other hand, the first section is a section in which the advantageous gaming state does not start and the advantageous gaming state does not continue.

The interval display section 67 is displayed when winning a combination with different winnings to be established according to the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or a combination with different winnings depending on the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the player to win a prize advantageous to the player is reported to the player, and in the case of an advantageous game state in which the expected value of acquisition of the game medium is 1 or more, the lighting state is set. Become. In this case, the pseudo-bonus state corresponds to the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state, while the second section, which is not in the pseudo-bonus state, does not correspond to the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when transitioning from the first section to the second section, the section display section 67 may or may not switch from the off state to the on state. If the section display section 67 is maintained in the off state when the second section is entered, the section display section 67 changes from the off state to the on state when the pseudo bonus state is started in the second section.

After entering the lighting state, the section display part 67 maintains the lighting state until the end of the second section, and turns off when the second section ends and shifts to the first section. Therefore, even if the pseudo-bonus state ends and the game state returns to the normal game state, the second section may be maintained. , when the second section ends, the section display section 67 is turned off.

As described above, once the section display section 67 is turned on in the second section, the lighting state is maintained until the second section ends. The display unit 66 is turned on when a game medium is awarded and turned off when the next game starts, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the image display device 63. When the game is over, it is turned on and turned off at the end of the game. Therefore, in a configuration in which the interval display portion 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too conspicuous to the player, only the interval display portion 67 is lit in the common display area 68 in the situation of the second interval. It is possible to positively create the state of the state, and it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the section display section 67 for the manager of the game hall.

Instead of maintaining the lighting state of the section display section 67 during the second section, the section display section 67 may blink at a predetermined cycle during the second section. Further, as the combined display section 66 and the section display section 67, other displays such as a liquid crystal display device may be used.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, a main controller 70 is provided above the reel unit 31 as shown in FIG. The main controller 70 is attached to the back plate 11b that forms the rear portion of the housing 11. As shown in FIG. The main controller 70 is constructed by housing a main control board 71 in a board box 81 . An MPU 72 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 71 . The board box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 accommodated in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81 . Although the board box 81 is formed colorless and transparent, it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 accommodated in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 in the board box 81 so that the facing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10 . Therefore, by opening the front door 12 toward the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11, it becomes possible to see the opposing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 and It is possible to see the MPU 72 through the opposing wall portion 82 .

The substrate box 81 is formed by assembling a plurality of case bodies back and forth, and these plurality of case bodies are provided with an adhesive to prevent the case bodies from separating and to leave traces when the case bodies are separated. A coupling portion 83 is provided. A plurality of coupling portions 83 are arranged side by side on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped board box 81 . As a result, in a state in which separation of the case body is prevented by using some of the joints 83, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the joints 83, another joint may be used after that. By connecting 83, separation of the case body can be prevented again. In addition, when the case body is separated, the connecting part 83 is destroyed and a trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body is being separated illegally by visually checking the connecting part 83. Become. A sealing seal 84 is attached to a side of the substrate box 81 other than the side on which the coupling portions 83 are arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the sealing seal 84 is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the sealing seal 84 is peeled off during the separation of the case body, it is possible to leave a trace thereof.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70, as shown in FIG. The effect control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 on the front door 12 . The effect control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61 , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 based on commands received from the main control device 70 . In addition, the production control device 90 has a control board housed in a board box in the same manner as the main control device 70 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main controller 70 as already described. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73. A RAM 74, a random number circuit 75 for sequentially updating random numbers within a predetermined numerical range based on a clock signal output from the clock circuit, and a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency are provided. In addition, the MPU 72 also incorporates an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 72 includes the reel unit 31, a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, and 44a that individually detect the operation of each of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44, and a medal insertion sensor. Inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted through slot 45, credit insertion detection sensors 47a and 48a for individually detecting operation of credit insertion buttons 47 and 48, and settlement detection sensor 51a for detecting operation of settlement button 51. , a payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, a reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54, a setting key detection sensor that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57, and the like. are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72 .

The output side of the MPU 72 is connected to the reel unit 31, the selector drive section 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the combined display section 66, the section display section 67, the effect control device 90, and the like. In each game, the MPU 72 controls the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reel unit 31. FIG. The selector 52 guides the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 to the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if reception is permitted, and to the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if reception is prohibited. It has a function of ejecting to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected. The selector drive unit 52a has a function of switching the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. and a position for prohibiting reception. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state by switching the output state and the stop state of the driving signal to the selector driving section 52a.

The MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are to be paid out. Further, the MPU 72 controls display of the combined display unit 66 so that the number of game media to be awarded is displayed when game media are awarded. Further, the MPU 72 controls the display of the section display unit 67 so that the second section is notified when the notification start trigger occurs in the second section. Further, the MPU 72 controls the dual-use display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the game management result is displayed. Further, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to the effect control device 90 for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the image display device 63. In this case, display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the performance control device 90 , while the direct display control of the combined display section 66 is performed by the MPU 72 . That is, for the image display device 63, which is subject to relatively complicated display control, direct display control is performed by the effect control device 90, and the combined display unit 66, which is subject to relatively simple display control. Direct display control is executed in the MPU 72 for . As a result, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes the improvement of attention to the presentation and a display that emphasizes reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72 .

An input side of the MPU 72 is connected to a power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply 54 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. It monitors the voltage being applied, and outputs a power failure signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage is below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing upon receiving the power failure signal, and after the power is restored, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power failure. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power-off power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power-off power when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power source is interrupted, data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied to the power supply unit during a power failure (for example, for one or two days). be done.

The performance control device 90 includes a performance control board 91 for controlling execution of various notifications and various performances. An MPU 92 is mounted on the effect control board 91 . The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A RAM 94 is built in, and a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are also built in.

It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips. In addition, the RAM 94 is not supplied with backup power from the power supply section of the power supply unit 54 when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, but the RAM 94 is supplied with backup power. good too.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 as already described, and receives various commands from the MPU 72 . An upper lamp 61 , a speaker 62 and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92 . Based on commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63, thereby performing various notifications and various effects. let it happen.

In addition to the MPU 92, the effect control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like, although not shown. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the image display device 63 . The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, reads image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing, and causes the image display device 63 to display the image data. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the image display device 63 . This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63 . When the MPU 92 determines the execution contents of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 stores a drawing list indicating the contents of the image corresponding to each update timing in the VDP according to the determined execution contents of the effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and uses the read image data to create display data in the video RAM. Then, the VDP outputs an image signal corresponding to the generated display data to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73 and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 will be referred to as the main MPU 72, main ROM 73 and main RAM 74 respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93 and RAM 94 of the effect control device 90 will be referred to as the effect side. They are referred to as an MPU 92, an effect-side ROM 93, and an effect-side RAM 94.

Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, first, an initialization process is executed (step S101). In the initialization processing, interrupts by the timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are made for the registers and I/O devices in the main MPU 72 . After that, it is determined whether or not the power is turned on while the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S102). If the power has been turned on while the ON operation was performed using the setting key (step S102: YES), if the reset button 56 was not pressed when the power was turned on (step S103: NO), After executing the partial clear process (step S104), the set value update process is executed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: YES), after executing all clear processing (step S105), set value update processing is executed (step S106). In the partial clear processing (step S104) and the full clear processing (step S105), a partial area or the entire area of the main RAM 74 is initialized. The contents of these partial clear processing (step S104) and all clear processing (step S105) will be described later.

In the setting value update process, the current setting value is read on condition that the setting key is inserted and turned on, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display section 65 . When the set value update process is executed, since either the partial clear process (step S104) or the all clear process (step S105) has been executed before that, a credit is displayed at the start of the set value update process. A display corresponding to the fact that the set value is "1" is displayed in the portion 65. FIG. In the set value update process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display section 65 . If the reset button 56 is operated while the set value is "6", the set value is updated to "1". When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the set value selected at that time becomes the set value set in the current set value update processing, and the set value update processing is terminated. do. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display section 65 is ended. After that, the process shifts to normal processing (step S107). The normal processing will be explained later in detail.

If the ON operation of the setting key has not been performed in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process after step S108 is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power shutdown. In the power restoration process, it is determined whether or not the setting values of the slot machine 10 are normal by checking the main RAM 74 (step S108). Specifically, when the set value is any one of "1" to "6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S109). A power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to "1". will be set. If the power failure flag is set to "1", it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to confirm whether the value is normal.

If affirmative determination is made in all of steps S108 to S110, it means that the power failure process at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, by writing the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 74 to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 and returning the data saved in the main RAM 74 to the register of the main MPU 72, the register of the main MPU 72 The state is restored to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). Also, the power failure flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). Thereafter, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing execution of the power recovery process to the effect side MPU 92 (step S113), the address before the power shutdown is restored (step S114).

Information indicating whether or not the main side RAM 74 stores either first CB winning data or second CB winning data, which will be described later, is set in the return command. That is, in step S113, it is determined whether or not the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the first CB winning data is stored, information indicating that the first CB winning data is stored. is sent to the production side MPU 92. Further, in step S113, it is determined whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the second CB winning data is stored, information indicating that the second CB winning data is stored. is sent to the production side MPU 92. Further, in step S113, when it is specified that both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are not stored in the main RAM 74, both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are not stored. A return command in a state in which information indicating that is set is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 .

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in any of steps S108 to S110, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S115), and all the output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0", thereby all actuators connected to the output ports are cleared. is turned off (step S116), and error notification processing is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S117). Then it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

In the register saving process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. FIG. In step S202, it is checked whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1", and if the power failure flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203 to execute power failure processing.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply 54 is input to the main MPU 72 . In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74 . After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, and subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power failure flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S205, the main MPU 72 performs an interrupt termination declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S206, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors provided for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

In step S207, sensor monitoring processing is performed to read the states of various sensors connected to the input port and to monitor whether the read results are normal. Here, the slot machine 10 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting tampering with the hopper device 53 . As already explained, the hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 when a prize corresponding to the awarding of game media is established on the main line ML. The hopper device 53 is provided with a payout device for paying out the medals stored in the storage tank toward the medal discharge port 58, and a payout detection sensor for detecting the medals paid out from the payout device. . When it is necessary to pay out the medals, the payout device is drive-controlled to pay out the medals, and the paid-out medals are detected by the payout detection sensor. When the number of medals detected by the payout detection sensor reaches the number of medals to be paid out, the payout of medals from the payout device is stopped. In this case, an illegal jig is inserted from the front of the slot machine 10 through the medal discharge port 58, and the payout detection sensor cannot detect medals by the illegal jig. A fraudulent act to pay out more medals than medals is assumed. In the slot machine 10, if the payout detection sensor does not detect medals for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) even though the payout device is driven and controlled to pay out medals, the payout device is driven as a payout abnormality. Although the control will be stopped, if the fraudulent act as described above is performed, a large number of medals will be paid out during the predetermined period. In addition, when a payout abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification is executed, but the abnormality notification is canceled by performing an abnormality canceling operation on the key cylinder 14 after the medals are replenished.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting an object moving toward the payout detection sensor from the medal discharge port 58 in order to prevent fraudulent activity as described above. A plurality of the object detection sensors are provided along the route from the medal discharge port 58 to the payout detection sensor. In the sensor monitoring process of step S207, when each object detection sensor becomes a detection state in the order of the object detection sensor on the payout detection sensor side → the object detection sensor on the medal discharge port 58 side within the abnormality detection period (for example, 5 seconds). However, if each object detection sensor becomes a detection state in the order of the object detection sensor on the medal discharge port 58 side → the object detection sensor on the payout detection sensor side within the abnormality detection period, an intrusion abnormality will occur. I judge. When it is determined that there is an intrusion abnormality, the intrusion abnormality flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and an intrusion abnormality command corresponding to the intrusion abnormality is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. - 特許庁As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the intrusion abnormality notification is executed. The intrusion abnormality notification is temporarily stopped by stopping the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10, but if the intrusion abnormality flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" after the supply of operating power is restarted, Since the transmission of the intrusion abnormality command to the production side MPU 92 is performed again, the intrusion abnormality notification is resumed. In order to cancel the state in which the intrusion abnormality flag is set to "1", it is necessary to execute a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105).

In step S208, timer subtraction processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S209, counter processing for outputting the result of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts to the outside is performed. In step S210, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the MPU 92 on the production side is performed. In step S211, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S212, the values of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are returned to the corresponding registers in the main MPU 72, respectively.

In step S213, a management process is executed for managing the game history and displaying the content corresponding to the management result on the combined display section 66. FIG. Specifically, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section, which will be described later, to the total number of games is calculated, and the ratio of the calculation result is displayed on the combined display section 66 . In this case, the ratio of the total number of games in the second interval to the total number of games may be calculated for each set value. In this configuration, even if the setting value is changed, the calculation may be continued without initializing the information of the ratio performed for each setting value. After that, in step S214, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S301). After that, start waiting processing is executed (step S302). FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the start waiting process.

First, it is determined whether or not a replay bet set flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S401). The replay bet set flag specifies whether or not the bet setting of the same number as the previous bet number has already been completed when any of the replay winnings have been established in the previous game. is a flag for If a negative determination is made in step S401, on the condition that any replay winning has been established in the previous game (step S402: YES), the bet number setting counter 74a provided in the main side RAM 74 (see FIG. 9 ), the value of the bet number history counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is set (step S403). The bet number setting counter 74a is a counter for specifying the bet number of the game to be executed by the main MPU 72, and the bet number history counter is for specifying the bet number of the previous game by the main MPU 72. is a counter of After that, the bet set flag for replay is set to "1" (step S404).

When the determination in step S401 is affirmative, when the determination in step S402 is negative, or when the process of step S404 is executed, a bet handling process is executed (step S405). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing bet handling processing.

If the current gaming state is not the second CB state (step S501: NO), "3" is set as the upper limit number of bets, which is the upper limit number of game media that can be betted in the current game (step S502). If the current gaming state is the second CB state (step S501: YES), "2" is set as the upper limit number of bets, which is the upper limit number of game media that can be betted in the current game (step S503). That is, in the slot machine 10, the upper limit bet number is set to "2" when in the second CB state, and the upper limit bet number is set to "3" when not in the second CB state.

When the process of step S502 or step S503 is executed, on condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is not the current bet upper limit number (step S504: NO), the stored virtual medals are It is determined whether or not an effective betting operation has been performed with one or more cards (step S505). The main RAM 74 is provided with a credit counter 74b (see FIG. 9) as an area for storing the number of virtual medals stored. In step S505, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter 74b is 1 or more, thereby determining whether or not there are one or more virtual medals stored. Further, when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, it is determined that a valid betting operation has been performed, and when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is increased. It is determined that a valid bet operation has been made on condition that the number is 1 or less.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S505, a bet setting process is executed (step S506). In the bet setting process, when the first credit input button 47 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of bets, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is changed. In addition to setting the bet upper limit number, the value corresponding to the number of virtual medals used for the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than the bet upper limit number. If so, the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0" after adding the value of the credit counter 74b to the bet number setting counter 74a. In addition, in the bet amount setting process, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet amount setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is 2 or more, the value of the bet amount setting counter 74a is is set to "2", the value for the number of virtual medals used for the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than 2 If so, the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0" after adding the value of the credit counter 74b to the bet number setting counter 74a.

If affirmative determination is made in step S504, if a negative determination is made in step S505, or if the processing of step S506 is executed, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a detects that medals have been inserted into the medal slot 45. It is determined whether or not one medal has been detected (step S507). When an affirmative determination is made in step S507, if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is less than the bet upper limit number (step S508: NO), the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is incremented by 1 (step S509). ), if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the upper limit bet number (step S508: YES), the value of the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S510). When the process of step S509 or step S510 is executed, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is greater than or equal to the upper limit bet number and the value of the credit counter 74b is greater than or equal to the upper limit stored memory number (specifically, "50"). (step S511: YES), the acceptance prohibition process is executed (step S512). By executing the reception prohibiting process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

If a negative determination is made in step S507, if a negative determination is made in step S511, or if the process of step S512 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the first CB state (step S513). . If the current gaming state is the first CB state (step S513: YES), on condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "3" (step S514: YES), the acceptance provided in the main side RAM 74 The time bet set flag is set to "1" (step S515). On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the first CB state (step S513: NO), on the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is 2 or more (step S516: YES), the bet set completion flag at the time of acceptance is set to "1" (step S515).

The bet set completion flag at the time of acceptance is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 whether or not the number of game media capable of starting one game has been betted. When the game state is the first CB state, one game cannot be started in a state where "3" game media are not betted. It is possible to start the second game. Further, when the game state is not the first CB state, one game cannot be started in a state where two or more game media are not betted, and one game can be started by betting two or more game media. It is possible to start the second game.

Returning to the description of the start waiting process (FIG. 13), after executing the bet handling process in step S405, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated (step S406). If the settlement button 51 has been operated (step S406: YES), after executing settlement processing (step S407), the bet set completion flag at the time of acceptance in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S408). In the settlement process of step S407, if the bet set flag at the time of replay in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1", the number of bets corresponding to the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b The hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the medals are discharged to the medal receiving tray 59. In this case, the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" and the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". On the other hand, when the bet set flag at the time of replay of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", the hopper device 53 is operated so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter 74b is discharged to the medal receiving tray 59. Drive control. In this case, the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

Returning to the description of the normal processing (FIG. 12), after executing the start waiting processing in step S302, either the replay bet set flag or the acceptance bet set flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". is set (step S303). If a negative determination is made in step S303, the process returns to step S302. If an affirmative determination is made in step S303, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S302.

If the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304: YES), after the main line ML is activated, reception prohibition processing is executed (step S305). By executing the reception prohibiting process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

After that, in step S306, setting processing at the time of starting for performing various settings when the game is started is executed, and in step S307, lottery processing for the winning combination in the current game is executed. At step S308, reel control processing is executed to drive and control the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery processing for the current combination.

After that, medium application processing is executed (step S309). In the medium awarding process, when a minor winning combination has been established in the current game, a process for awarding the player with a number of game media corresponding to the winning of the minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, when virtual medals are awarded, a value corresponding to the current minor winning combination is added to the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter 74b reaches the upper limit storage memory number. drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit storage memory number is paid out to the medal receiving tray 59 . In addition, in the medium provision process, display control is performed on the dual-use display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the number of game media to be provided this time is performed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the combined display section 66 continues until a new bet of game media is made.

After that, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state and the game section corresponding to the result of the current game (step S310). Also, an external output setting process for outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the gaming hall is executed (step S311). Thereafter, acceptance permission processing is executed (step S312). By executing the acceptance permission process, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

Next, the setting process at the time of start executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, both the replay bet set flag and the accept bet set flag in the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0" (step S601). After that, when the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3" (step S602: NO), the first bet number command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S603), When the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "2" (step S602: YES), a second bet number command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S604). The first bet number command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the bet number of the game started this time is "3", and the second bet number command is a command that the bet number of the game started this time is " 2” is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that it is.

When the processing of step S603 or step S604 is executed, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is set to the bet number history counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S605). Note that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" when the current game ends.

Next, the winning lottery process executed in step S307 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S701, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. The slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the random number at that time is latched from the random number circuit 75 . The random number circuit 75 generates a random number from “0” to “65535”, and the main MPU 72 stores the latched value in the random number circuit 75 in the main RAM 74 when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The random number circuit 75 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, the lottery table for judging the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S702). In this slot machine 10, six levels of setting values from "1" to "6" are prepared in advance. It is possible to set whether the lottery process for the winning combination is to be executed based on the winning probability corresponding to which set value. A set value of "n+1" is more advantageous to the player than "n" in winning probability. Specifically, the set value of "n+1" is more advantageous for the player than the set value of "n" because the winning probability of the predetermined combination is higher than the set value of "n". . Also, even if the set value is the same level, the number of betted game media of "3" is more advantageous for the player than the number of bets of "2". In addition, there are a first CB state and a second CB state as game states. In step S702, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value, the current bet number, and the current gaming state is selected.

The lottery table in the non-CB state will be described using the case where the set value is "3" as an example. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination lottery table when betting 3 cards, which is selected when the number of bets is "3", and FIG. 18 is selected when the number of bets is "2". FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination lottery table when two cards are bet; In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 19 will be referred to as appropriate.

The index value IV is set in the combination lottery table as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 regardless of whether 3 coins are bet or 2 coins are bet. Each index value IV is associated with winning data (that is, a winning combination), and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding index value IV in relation to the maximum value of the random number circuit 75 (“65535”). In addition, the number of index value IVs is the same when betting 3 cards and when betting 2 cards. It is the same at time and at the time of betting two cards.

Specifically, the index values IV=1 to 6 are set with the first bell winning data and any one of the first to sixth compensation winning data are set. If the winning is made with the index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. When the reel 32M is the middle reel 32M and the reel 32R is the third stop (reel where the last stop command is issued), the first bell win is guaranteed regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Otherwise, the first compensation winning prize can be established. When winning with index value IV=2, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is established without fail, and in other cases, the fourth compensation winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=3, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is established without fail, and in other cases, the third complementary winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=4, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is established without fail, and in other cases, the sixth compensation winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=5, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is established without fail, and in other cases, the second compensation winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=6, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is surely established, and in other cases, the fifth compensation winning can be established.

In the present slot machine 10, as already explained, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled so that up to four symbols can be slid. done. In other words, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to facilitate establishment of a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and to avoid establishment of a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, only one reel 32L, 32M, 32R constitutes a combination of symbols for establishing a prize. If there are 5 or more symbols between the constituent symbols, depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML (this phenomenon is also known as "dropout"). say). The 1st bell winning, 2nd bell winning and various replay winnings are a winning mode in which no loss occurs when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order. The watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, the cherry prize, the first CB prize, and the second CB prize are prize modes in which failure can occur depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The index values IV=7 to 9 are set with the second bell winning data and any one of the seventh to ninth compensation winning data. When winning with index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. The second bell winning prize is established without fail regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the seventh compensation winning prize can be established. When winning with the index value IV=8, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be the second stop and the third stop and the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 Regardless of the timing, the 2nd bell winning is surely established, and in other cases, the 9th compensation winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=9, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be the second stop and the third stop and the operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 Regardless of the timing, the 2nd bell winning is surely established, and in other cases, the 8th compensation winning can be established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the index value IV=10 is set with first bell winning data and special bell winning data. When winning with index value IV=10, as shown in FIG. The winning of the first bell is established without fail regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. On the other hand, when the first stop is either the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, a special bell prize can be established regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R targeted for the second stop and the third stop. However, depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the special bell prize will not be established. In this case, the first bell win is established regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R targeted for the second stop and the third stop and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. In other words, when the win is made with the index value IV=10 and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, establishment of the special bell prize is given priority, and the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is given priority. When the special bell winning cannot be established due to the timing, the first bell winning is surely established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the first watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=11. If a win is made with the index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 19, the first watermelon win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first watermelon prize will not be established. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the second watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=12. If a win is made with the index value IV=12, as shown in FIG. 19, the second watermelon win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second watermelon prize will not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only cherry-winning data is set for the index value IV=13. If a win is made with the index value IV=13, as shown in FIG. 19, a cherry win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that the cherry winning will not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the first chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=14. When winning with index value IV=14, as shown in FIG. 19, 1st chance replay winning is established without fail regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. do. Also, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the second chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=15. When winning with index value IV=15, as shown in FIG. 19, regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44, the second chance replay winning is established without fail. do. Also, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV=16. When winning with index value IV=16, as shown in FIG. 19, normal replay winning is established without regard to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44.

For the index value IV=17, only the first CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. Only the second CB winning data is set as shown. In other words, the first CB winning data is set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", and the first CB winning is only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3". can be established. The second CB winning data is set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2", and the second CB winning is only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". can be established. When the first CB winning data is set, if the number of game media bets is "3", as shown in FIG. 19, the first CB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, there is a possibility that the first CB winning will not be established. When the second CB winning data is set, if the number of game media bets is "2", the second CB winning can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, as shown in FIG. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, there is a possibility that the second CB winning will not be established.

Here, the winning data other than the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the corresponding winning has been established, and are deleted in the games following the winning game. is not carried over. On the other hand, the 1st CB winning data and the 2nd CB winning data are cleared by the main side RAM 74 (the 1st CB winning data is partially cleared (step S104) or completely cleared (step S105), the 2nd CB winning data is stored until the corresponding prize is established, even in the games following the winning game, except when the all clearing process (step S105) is performed. In this case, in a game in which one of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery.

In other words, as a result of playing the game in a situation where the number of bets is "3", the first CB winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 and the first CB winning data is carried over because the first CB winning has not been established. In this state, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets "3" after that, and the number of bets is increased after that. Even if the game is played under the condition of "2", the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery. In addition, as a result of the game being played in a situation where the number of bets is "2", the second CB winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 and the second CB winning data is carried over because the second CB winning has not been established. In this state, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets "3" after that, and the number of bets is increased after that. Even if the game is played under the condition of "2", the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery. Thus, to prevent either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data from being newly stored although either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is already stored. is possible, and it is possible to prevent a plurality of CB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

17 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=1, the probability of winning when the index value IV=2, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=3 , the probability of winning when the index value IV=4, the probability of winning when the index value IV=5, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=6 are each about 1/ 21.8. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=7, the probability of winning when the index value IV=8, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=9 are approximately 1/21.8. be. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=10 is about 1/9.4. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=11 is about 1/164. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=12 is about 1/146. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=13 is about 1/423. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=14 is about 1/328. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=15 is about 1/164. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=16 is about 1/7.3. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/3.3.

On the other hand, when the combination lottery table for betting 2 cards in FIG. 18 is selected, the probability of winning for each of the index values IV=1 to 16 is higher than when the combination lottery table for betting 3 cards is selected. low probability. Specifically, when the combination lottery table is selected for a two-coin bet, the probability of winning for each of the index values IV=1 to 16 is the probability when the combination lottery table is selected for a three-coin bet. is less than 2/3 of the probability. As a result, the game executed with the game medium "3" bet is accompanied by the awarding of the game medium more than the game executed with the game medium "2" bet. It is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of a replay prize in which a small winning prize and a replay are awarded.

However, when the combination lottery table for betting two cards is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/2.2. On the other hand, when the combination lottery table for betting 3 cards is selected as described above, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/3.3. As a result, the probability that the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the game executed in the state where "2" game media is betted is executed in the state where "3" game media are betted. It is possible to increase the probability that the first CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the game played.

In addition to the combination lottery table for 3-coin bet and the combination lottery table for 2-coin bet, the main-side ROM 73 also contains the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in each of the first CB state and second CB state. A lottery table for CB is stored which is referred to by . Only one index value IV is set in the lottery table for CB, and normal replay winning data is set in the one index value IV. The probability of winning with the index value IV is 3/10, and when winning with the index value IV, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped if the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is a predetermined timing. Regardless of the order, regular replay prizes are established. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored. On the other hand, if the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing even though the index value IV is won, or if the index value IV is not won, the first bell win can be established.

Here, the index values IV other than the index values IV=12 and 15 have the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6". This applies both when the number of game media bet is "3" and when it is "2". On the other hand, the winning probabilities of index values IV=12 and 15 are different between set values of "1" to "6". Specifically, the probability of winning with the index value IV=12 is lowest when the setting value is "1", the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability of winning is, and the higher the setting value is, the highest when the setting value is "6". expensive. Also, the probability of winning with the index value IV=15 is lowest for the set value of "1", the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning, and the higher the set value is, the highest for the set value of "6". As a result, it is possible to provide a difference in the degree of advantage between the set values "1" to "6".

Returning to the description of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), after selecting the lottery table in step S702 and setting the index value IV to 1 (step S703), the judgment value DV used when judging whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set. Set (step S704). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. Note that in the initial determination value setting process, the random number value obtained in step S701 is used as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the index value IV=1, which is the current index value IV, is set to this random number value. is added to obtain a new determination value DV.

After that, the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is determined (step S705). Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds "65535" is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds "65535" (step S705: YES), winning data acquisition processing for setting winning data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S706).

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S705: NO), it means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, after adding 1 to the index value IV (step S707), it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined (step S708). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S704 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S704, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S705, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

If the process of step S706 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S708, this means that the determination of whether the winning combination is correct has been completed. In this case, stop information first setting processing for setting stop information for reel stop control is performed (step S709). After that, in step S710, an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed, in step S711, the first control process of the game section is executed, and in step S712, a stop order notification control process is executed. Details of the processing in steps S710 to S712 will be described later.

After that, a game start command transmission process is executed (step S713). In the transmission process, if any winning combination is won in the current lottery process (FIG. 16), information corresponding to the winning combination and information corresponding to the current gaming state. , and information corresponding to the processing results of steps S710 and S711 are set in a game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 . The game start command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started, and is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize various information determined by the main side MPU 72. .

When receiving the game start command, the effect-side MPU 92 grasps various information about the current game from the game start command. Then, the effect-side MPU 92 determines the content of the effect in a manner corresponding to the grasped various information. Then, the data table corresponding to the content of the determined performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 are performed according to the read data table. Execute control.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed (step S801). In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started rotating in the previous game. waits until the wait time elapses. When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74 . By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing of step S206 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R reaches a constant speed, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting a lamp (not shown) of each stop button 42-44. Players and the like are notified of this.

After that, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S802). If none of the stop buttons 42-44 has been operated, the process of step S802 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42-44 is operated. When it is determined that any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, it is determined whether the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R have been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. (step S803). If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S802, and the process of step S802 is repeatedly executed until any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S804). The stop instruction command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is transmitted, stop control processing shown in steps S805 to S811 is performed to stop the spinning reels.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower stage) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S805). Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. After that, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S806).

In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are slid by one symbol and then stopped, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being slid by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being slid by three symbols, and four symbols. There are 5 patterns of stop modes, including a stop mode of stopping after sliding. Therefore, in step S806, any value from "0" to "4" is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM74.

After that, the calculated sliding number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position (step S807). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal (step S808), and if they are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R A reel stop process for stopping the rotation of is performed (step S809). After that, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S810). If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed (step S811), and the process returns to step S802.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). , it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") with respect to the arrival symbol that has reached the base position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to stop. As the stop information, sliding number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the sliding number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each lottery result and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sliding number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. .

As the processing for setting the stop information, the stop information first setting processing executed in step S709 of the combination lottery processing (FIG. 16) and the reel control processing (FIG. 20) executed in step S811. There is a stop information second setting process. In the first stop information setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process for the combination. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process is changed after the reel is stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, and the stop numbers of the stopped reels 32L, 32M and 32R. .

When it is determined in step S810 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, a prize determination process is executed in step S812. In the winning determination process, the types of symbols stopped on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are grasped. Then, based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process. It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponds to each other, and if the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, it is determined that the winning combination has been won and the winning handling process is executed.

In the winning handling process, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that game media can be awarded in the medium awarding process if the winning is a minor win. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed for executing the replay setting process in the next start waiting process (FIG. 13).

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S813). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the current winning has been established, and, if the winning has been established, data indicating the type of the winning.

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 21, the processing for dealing with the end of the game, which is executed in step S310 of the normal processing (FIG. 12), will be described. In addition, since the process of step S310 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is executed after the reel control process (step S308), the corresponding process at the end of the game is to stop the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game. will be executed after

First, CB processing is executed to perform transition control and progression control for the first CB state or the second CB state (step S901). The CB processing will be described later in detail. Thereafter, on the condition that the game is neither the first CB state nor the second CB state (step S902: NO), the process jumps to the process corresponding to the current game state (step S904). Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the normal processing is executed (step S905), and when the gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state, the pseudo-bonus processing is performed (step S906), When the game state is the end preparation state, the second control process of the game section is executed (step S906). Further, when either the normal process of step S904 or the pseudo-bonus process of step S905 is executed, the second control process (step S906) of the game section is executed. Details of the processing in steps S904 to S906 will be described later.

When the current gaming state is the first CB state or the second CB state, the affirmative determination is made in step S902, so that the normal processing in step S904 and the pseudo-bonus processing in step S905 are not executed. Therefore, in the case of the first CB state or the second CB state, the processing for advancing the normal game state and the processing for advancing the pseudo-bonus state are not executed. On the other hand, even if the current game state is the first CB state or the second CB state, the second control process for the game section in step S906 is executed. Therefore, even in the case of the first CB state or the second CB state, the processing for advancing the second section is executed.

<About game status and game section>
Next, the game state and game section will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining game states and game intervals that exist in the slot machine 10. As shown in FIG.

In this slot machine 10, as game states, there are a normal game state ST1, a first CB state ST2, a second CB state ST3, a pseudo-bonus state ST4, and an end preparation state ST5. These game states ST1 to ST5 do not overlap each other.

The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which the main side RAM 74 is partially cleared (step S104) or completely cleared (step S105). Further, when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 generated in the normal game state ST1 ends, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1 when the end preparation state ST5 ends. In the normal game state ST1, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2".

The normal game state ST1 is the expected net increase in game media in one game ("expected number of game media to be given in one game" to "game media bet in one game number of media”) is less than 1. In addition, the normal game state ST1 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and a state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored on the main side. There is an internal state stored in RAM 74 .

The first CB state ST2 is a game state to which the game is shifted when the first CB winning is established while the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 . In the first CB state ST2, one game can be executed when the number of bets on game media is "3", while one game can be executed when the number of bets on game media is "2". can't Also, the second CB state ST3 is a game state to which the game is shifted when the second CB winning is established in a situation where the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM74. In the second CB state ST3, one game can be executed when the bet number of game media is "2", while the upper limit bet number is set to "2", so "3" game media are bet. Can not do it.

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states in which the game media owned by the player are not increased. Furthermore, in both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state is greater than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. It is a game state in which the number of is reduced. Details of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 will be described later. .

The pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a game state that is shifted to when conditions for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are established in the normal game state ST1. The pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends when the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 becomes "0" or when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. When the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, and when the second section SC2 ends when shifting to the normal game state ST1, the game shifts to the end preparation state ST5. When the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, and when the second section SC2 does not end at the time of shifting to the normal game state ST1, the state shifts to the end preparation state ST5. Then, the normal game state ST1 is entered. Further, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends by satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The pseudo bonus state ST4 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and a state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. There is a stored internal state.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when any one of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is notified. Further, in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when any one of the index values IV=7 to 9 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the second bell prize is notified. A game medium of “15” is awarded when the first bell win or the second bell win is established. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if 3 coins are bet, the net increase expected value of the game media in one game is 1 or more, and if 2 coins are bet in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the amount of game media in 1 game. Net increase expected value is less than 1.

The end preparation state ST5 is the case where the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied, and the second section SC2 ends when the subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1 occurs. It is a game state that shifts to . The end preparation state ST5 ends when one game is executed. When the end preparation state ST5 ends, the game moves to the normal game state ST1. In the end preparation state ST5, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The end preparation state ST5 is a game state in which the expected net increase in game media in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether 3 or 2 are bet. Further, in the end preparation state ST5, there is a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side. There is an internal state stored in RAM 74 .

In the configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST5 exist as described above, game sections are set separately from these game states ST1 to ST5. A first section SC1 and a second section SC2 are set as game sections. In other words, in the slot machine 10, the number of game media bets of "2" and "3", set values of "1" to "6", various game states ST1 to ST5, and There are game sections of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2.

The first section SC1 includes the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable establishment of a winning that is advantageous to the player when a winning combination to be established is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Due to the notification of the stop order, the net increase expected value of game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media betted in one game" from the "expected number of game media given in one game") is 1 or more. This is a section in which an advantageous game state (pseudo-bonus state ST4) that can be obtained does not start, and the above-mentioned advantageous game state does not continue. When the partial clearing process (step S104) or the complete clearing process (step S105) of the main side RAM 74 is executed, the game state is normal game state ST1 and becomes the first section SC1. In addition, when the initialization process for the second section SC2 is executed in the second section SC2, the first section SC1 also occurs. The second section SC2 is a section in which the advantageous gaming state can be started and in which the advantageous gaming state can be continued.

FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first section SC1 and the second section SC2. When the partial clearing process (step S104) or the complete clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed as described above, the first section SC1 is executed, and the second section SC2 is initialized. also becomes the first section SC1. On the other hand, the second section SC2 is shifted from the first section SC1 by generating an opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 based on the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first section SC1. In this case, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the first section SC1, a transition to the second section SC2 may occur, while the bet number of the first section SC1 is "2". Even if a certain game is executed, there is no opportunity to shift to the second section SC2. Therefore, a player who expects to shift from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 needs to play a game with a bet number of "3" instead of a game with a bet number of "2". There is

In the first section SC1, the expected value of the net increase in game media in one game is certainly less than 1. In the second section SC2, the expected net increase in the amount of game media in one game is less than 1. It may be 1 or more. Therefore, the second section SC2 is more advantageous than the first section SC1. Therefore, the player expects the first section SC1 to shift to the second section SC2.

The first section SC1 ends when an opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 occurs, and shifts to the second section SC2. On the other hand, the second section SC2 can end when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the end preparation state ST5 ends and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. When the second section SC2 ends, the process proceeds to the first section SC1. In addition, as a condition for ending the second section SC2, the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2 without transition to the first section SC1 is the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games). ) and the continuation of the second section SC2 without transition to the first section SC1, the total number of restricted net additions of game media reaches the upper limit net addition number (specifically, 2400). An ending condition is set that either one of the conditions for reaching is satisfied. The restricted total net increase in the number of game media refers to "the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0 when no game media are awarded"). ")" minus the "total number of game media consumed to execute the game while the second section SC2 is being continued ("0" when the game is not being executed)" In the case of the difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is set as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets is the increase of the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value.

In other words, when the second section SC2 is continued and the total number of net increases with restrictions on the number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase number, the second section SC2 ends and the second section SC2 ends. It shifts to 1 section SC1. Further, when the number of games executed since the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games by continuing the second section SC2, the second section SC2 ends and the first section SC1 starts. Transition. When one of these ending conditions is met, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is ended in the game in which the ending condition is met even in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the second section SC2 is ended. Then, the state shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing excessively.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the player can stay in either the first section SC1 or the second section SC2. On the other hand, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the termination preparation state ST5 do not stay in the first section SC1, but stay only in the second section SC2.

FIG. 23(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each game state ST1 to ST5 in the second section SC2. As already explained, in the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the ready-to-end state ST5, the game can be executed in any of the situations in which the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". Further, in the first CB state ST2, the game can be executed only when the number of game media bet is "3", and in the second CB state ST3, only when the number of game media bet is "2". It is possible to run the game. This is the same even if the game section is the second section SC2.

In the case of the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, whether the game with the bet number of "3" or the game with the bet number of "2" is executed. The net increase expected value of game media is less than one. In this case, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, as will be described later, a lottery process for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 can be executed based on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination in each game. , the transition lottery process is executed in the game with the bet number of "3", but is not executed in the game with the bet number of "2". In addition, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, as will be described later, the value of the canceled game number counter 74e provided in the main side RAM 74 is decremented by 1 each time one game is executed, and after the decrement of 1, When the value of the number-of-released-games counter 74e is "0", the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed. is executed, but is not executed in games where the number of bets is "2". Therefore, in the normal game state ST1 in the second interval SC2, a game with a bet number of "3" is better to be executed than a game with a bet number of "2". It is advantageous for the player.

When the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is set in the second section SC2, the net increase expected value of the game media can be 1 or more when the game with the bet number of "3" is executed. is executed, the expected net increase in game media is less than one. Therefore, in the case of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2, the game with the bet number of "3" should be executed instead of the game with the bet number of "2". It is more advantageous for the player than

As described above, in the normal game state ST1 and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2, even if it is more advantageous to execute the game with the number of bets "3", the second section SC2 The number of game media awarded in a game with a bet number of "2" in either the normal game state ST1 or the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in SC2 is added as the restricted total net increase number of game media in the second section SC2. In addition, games with a bet number of "2" in either the normal game state ST1 or the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2 are added as the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2. be. In other words, in either the normal game state ST1 or the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2, a game in which the number of bets is "2" is disadvantageous to the player. It ends up contributing to the side that establishes the conditions. From this point of view as well, in the case of either the normal game state ST1 or the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2, it would be better if the game with the bet number of "3" is executed. '' is more advantageous to the player than having a game run.

Even in the second section SC2, the first CB winning can be established and the second CB winning can be established in the same manner as in the first section SC1. When the first CB win is established in the second section SC2, the second section SC2 enters the first CB state ST2, and the second section SC2 is maintained even after the first CB state ST2 and after the first CB state ST2 ends. be. In addition, when the second CB winning is established in the second section SC2, the second section SC2 becomes the second CB state ST3, and the second section SC2 continues even after the second CB state ST3 and when the second CB state ST3 ends. maintained. In both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, as already explained, the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state is greater than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. This is a game state in which the number of media is reduced. That is, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the games executed in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 in the second section SC2 are added as the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2. In other words, although the games executed in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are disadvantageous to the player, the games contribute to fulfilling the ending condition of the second section SC2. . Therefore, if the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, it is more disadvantageous for the player.

It should be noted that in the end preparation state ST5, the amount of game media is reduced regardless of whether a game with a bet number of "3" is executed or a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the second section SC2. Although the net increase expected value is less than 1, it is a gaming state in which only one game is executed while the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, the games executed in the end preparation state ST5 do not contribute to the restricted total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2, and furthermore do not contribute to the total number of games in the second section SC2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even a game executed in the end preparation state ST5 contributes to the restricted total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2, and furthermore, in the second section SC2 It may be configured to contribute to the total number of games.

<Regarding CB states ST2 and ST3>
Next, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are described in detail. FIG. 24(a) shows the first CB winning combination (that is, the index value IV at which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74) and the second CB winning combination (that is, the second CB winning data that is stored in the main RAM 74). FIG. 24B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the index value IV), and FIG. 24B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the first CB combination can be won in games where the number of bets is "3", but cannot be won in games where the number of bets is "2". In a game where the number of bets is "3", the first CB combination is won with a probability of about 1/3.3. However, the winning state of the first CB role (that is, the state in which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the winning state of the second CB role (that is, the state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), In either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the first CB combination is excluded from the lottery targets in the lottery process (FIG. 16).

The second CB combination can be won in games where the number of bets is "2", but cannot be won in games where the number of bets is "3". In a game where the number of bets is "2", the second CB role is won with a probability of about 1/2.2. However, the winning state of the first CB role (that is, the state in which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the winning state of the second CB role (that is, the state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), In either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the second CB combination is excluded from the lottery targets in the lottery process (FIG. 16).

In the winning state of the 1st CB combination, the 1st CB winning can be realized in the game with the bet number of "3", while the 1st CB winning can not be established in the game with the bet number of "2". Therefore, when a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the winning state of the 1st CB combination, even if the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) results in no winning of any index value IV. , regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first CB prize is not established. Further, when a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the winning state of the first CB combination, even if the winning index value IV that can cause a so-called dropout occurs in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16), reel Regardless of the order of stopping 32L, 32M, and 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, the first CB prize is not established. When the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed in the winning state of the first CB combination and the first CB prize is established, the state becomes the first CB state ST2.

As shown in FIG. 24(b), in the first CB state ST2, it is possible to execute a game in which the bet number is "3", and in a situation where the bet number is 2 or less, it is possible to execute the game. Impossible. In the first CB state ST2, normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 with a probability of 3/10 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game. If the operation timing of the button 42 is a predetermined timing, a normal replay prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored.

In the first CB state ST2, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), or when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the left stop button 42 is pressed. When the normal replay winning cannot be established because the operation timing is not the predetermined timing, the first bell winning can be established. In this case, the winning of the first bell is achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

However, it is not limited to this, and when normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first CB state ST2, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the normal replay prize is established reliably regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. Also, in the first CB state ST2, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the stopping of the stop buttons 42 to 44 A configuration may be adopted in which the winning of the first bell is surely established regardless of the operation timing.

When the first bell win is established in the first CB state ST2, the game medium of "1" is provided. As already explained, in the first CB state ST2, the game can be executed only when "3" game media are betted. On the other hand, the number of game media awarded in the game in the first CB state ST2 is "1". Then, the first CB state ST2 ends when "30" game media are awarded. Therefore, in the first CB state ST2, it is necessary to generate 30 times the event that "1" game media is awarded in the game executed by betting "3" game media. The game media possessed by the player will decrease by at least 60 from the start of the first CB state ST2 to the end of the first CB state ST2. Therefore, the first CB state ST2 is a game state disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the first CB state ST2, as described above, the normal replay winning may be established, and both the normal replay winning and the first bell winning may not be established. Then, when the first CB state ST2 occurs in the second section SC2, the first CB state ST2, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues for 30 games or more, and the number of games is executed in the second section SC2. added to the total number of games played.

In the winning state of the second CB combination, the second CB winning can be established in the game with the bet number of "2", while the second CB winning is not established in the game with the bet number of "3". Therefore, when a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed in the winning state of the 2nd CB combination, even if the lottery process of the combination (FIG. 16) results in no winning of any index value IV. , the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44 do not establish the second CB winning. Further, when a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed in the winning state of the 2nd CB combination, even if the winning index value IV that can cause a so-called dropout occurs in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16), reel The second CB prize is not established regardless of the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. When a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination and the second CB winning is established, the state becomes the second CB state ST3.

As shown in FIG. 24(b), in the second CB state ST3, the game can be executed in a situation where the number of bets is "2", and the maximum bet number of game media is "2". In the second CB state ST3, normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 with a probability of 3/10 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game. If the operation timing of the button 42 is a predetermined timing, a normal replay prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored.

In the second CB state ST3, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), or when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, the left stop button 42 is pressed. When the normal replay winning cannot be established because the operation timing is not the predetermined timing, the first bell winning can be established. In this case, the winning of the first bell is achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

However, it is not limited to this, and in the second CB state ST3, when normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the combination, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the normal replay prize is established reliably regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. In addition, in the second CB state ST3, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the combination, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop of each stop button 42-44 A configuration may be adopted in which the winning of the first bell is surely established regardless of the operation timing.

If the first bell win is established in the second CB state ST3, the game medium of "1" is provided. As already explained, in the second CB state ST3, the game can be executed only when "2" game media are betted. On the other hand, the number of game media awarded in the game in the second CB state ST3 is "1". Then, the second CB state ST3 ends when "30" game media are awarded. Therefore, in the second CB state ST3, it is necessary to generate 30 times the event that "1" game media is awarded in the game executed by betting "2" game media. The game media possessed by the player will decrease by at least 30 from the start of the second CB state ST3 to the end of the second CB state ST3. Therefore, the second CB state ST3 becomes a game state disadvantageous to the player. However, this disadvantage of the second CB state ST3 is lower than that of the first CB state ST2.

Further, in the second CB state ST3, as described above, the normal replay winning can be established, and both the normal replay winning and the first bell winning may not be established. Then, when the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, the second CB state ST3, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues for 30 or more games, and the number of games is executed in the second section SC2. added to the total number of games played.

As described above, in the configuration in which the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are set as game states disadvantageous to the player, by executing the game with the number of bets "2", the winning state of the second CB combination is obtained. At the same time, after preventing the second CB winning from being established, the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed. Regardless of the order and the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, it is possible to play the game while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. That is, when the second CB role is won by executing a game in which the number of bets is "2", a game in which the number of bets is "3" is subsequently executed to achieve the second CB role. Even in the winning state of , the second CB prize is not established. Also, in the winning state of the second CB role, even if a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed, the first CB role is excluded from the lottery targets in the role lottery process (FIG. 16). will not be elected. Since the winning state of the first CB combination is not established, the first CB prize is not established, and the game state does not shift to the first CB state ST2. As a result, it is possible to execute a game with a bet number of "3" while preventing transitions to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. Then, by executing a game in which the number of bets is "3", a transition to the second section SC2 can occur as already described, and a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 can occur.

Here, in the slot machine 10, it is assumed that the processing for clearing all of the main side RAM 74 (step S105) is executed for the purpose of obtaining an illegal profit. For example, in a situation where medals are to be paid out, an illegal jig is used for the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53 to prevent medals from being detected, thereby paying out more medals than should be paid out. It is assumed that there will be fraudulent acts that On the other hand, as already explained, the slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting the entry of the illegal jig, and the object detection sensor detects the entry of the illegal jig. Intrusion anomaly notification is executed when Therefore, even if the fraudulent jig is inserted in such a way that it is not detected by the object detection sensor, the fraudulent jig is used to repeat the act of illegally paying out a large number of medals. Intrusion of an illegal jig may be detected by an object detection sensor, and intrusion abnormality notification may be executed. In this case, it is assumed that the fraudulent person will forcibly terminate the intrusion abnormality notification by illegally executing the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 . Then, it is assumed that a game is played using the illegally obtained medals in the present slot machine 10 in which the intrusion abnormality notification is not executed.

However, when such a fraudulent act is performed, the main side RAM 74 is completely cleared (step S105), so that the main side RAM 74 does not store the second CB winning data. In other words, it is not in the winning state of the second CB combination. When a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in a state in which the second CB role is not won, the first CB role can be won, and if the first CB award is established, the player will be disadvantaged. It becomes the first CB state ST2, which is a game state. As a result, it becomes possible to give a disadvantage to the person who has committed the above fraudulent act. On the other hand, in a game hall, a game with a bet number of "2" is executed before the opening of the business, and the second CB role is won. On the other hand, it is possible to play a game with a bet number of "3" while preventing the occurrence of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the probability of winning the second CB role in a game where the number of bets is "2" is about 1/2.2, whereas in a game where the number of bets is "3" The probability of winning the first CB role is about 1/3.3. That is, the probability of winning the second CB combination is set higher than the probability of winning the first CB combination. As a result, when the second CB role is won by executing a game in which the number of bets is "2" in a game hall or the like, the number of games required until the second CB role is won is reduced. becomes possible. On the other hand, even if a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed before the 2nd CB role is erroneously won, the probability of winning the 1st CB role is higher than the probability of winning the 2nd CB role. By making it low, it is possible to make it difficult to win the first CB combination.

The probability of winning the 2nd CB role is not limited to a configuration higher than the probability of winning the 1st CB role, and the probability of winning the 1st CB role is higher than the probability of winning the 2nd CB role. A high configuration may be employed, and a configuration may be employed in which the probability of winning the first CB role and the probability of winning the second CB role are the same or substantially the same.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the CB processing executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG. Incidentally, the CB process is executed in step S901 in the corresponding process (FIG. 21) at the end of the game. As already explained, the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 21) is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game. will be executed after all rotations of are stopped.

By determining whether or not "1" is set to either the first CB state flag or the second CB state flag provided in the main side RAM 74, the current gaming state is changed to the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. (step S1001). The first CB state flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game state is the first CB state ST2 in the main side MPU 72, and the second CB state flag mainly indicates whether or not the game state is the second CB state ST3. This is a flag for identification by the side MPU 72 .

If a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the first CB winning has been established in this game (step S1002). That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the first CB winning has stopped on the main line ML while the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 . If the first CB winning has been established (step S1002: YES), the first CB status flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1003), and the first CB winning data in the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S1004). ). Then, a first CB winning command indicating that the state has shifted to the first CB state ST2 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1005). As a result, the gaming state becomes the first CB state ST2. In the first CB state ST2, the processing of steps S513 to S515 in the bet handling processing (FIG. 14) is executed as already described, so that the game is executed only in the situation where "3" game media are betted. The Rukoto.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the second CB winning has been established in this game (step S1006). That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the second CB winning has stopped on the main line ML while the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 . If the second CB winning has been established (step S1006: YES), the second CB status flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1007), and the second CB winning data in the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S1008). ). Then, a second CB winning command indicating that the state has shifted to the second CB state ST3 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1009). As a result, the gaming state becomes the second CB state ST3. In the second CB state ST3, the processing of steps S503, S508, S515, and S516 in the bet handling processing (FIG. 14) is executed as already described, so that the game media "2" are betted. The game will be executed only at

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the first bell winning has been established in the current game (step S1010). If the first bell winning has been established (step S1010: YES), 1 is added to the value of the total award counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1011). The total given counter is a counter for specifying the total number of game media given in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 by the main side MPU 72, and the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is started. Cleared to "0" when

When the value of the total grant counter after adding 1 becomes "30" which is the end reference number of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 (step S1012: YES), the CBs corresponding to the current CB states ST2 and ST3 The status flag is cleared to "0" (step S1013). Then, a CB end command indicating that the current CB states ST2 and ST3 have ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1014).

Next, how the game state shifts to the CB states ST2 and ST3 and how the shift to the CB states ST2 and ST3 is restricted will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 26(a) shows a period in which the game is played with "3" game media being bet, and FIG. 26(b) shows a period in which the game is played with "2" game media being bet. FIG. 26(c) shows the period during which the 1st CB combination is won, FIG. 26(d) shows the period during which the 2nd CB combination is won, and FIG. 26(e) shows the period. Shows the period in which the first CB winning or the second CB winning can be established, FIG. 26(f) shows the period in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, and FIG. 26(g) shows the first section FIG. 26(h) shows a period during which the game can be completed in the second section SC2, in SC1.

First, the case where transitions to the CB states ST2 and ST3 are restricted will be described.

At the timing t1, which is the timing after the processing for clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105), a game with a bet number of "2" is started as shown in FIG. 26(b). In this case, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the game section is the first section SC1, and the state is the normal game state ST1. Then, the game with the number of bets "2" is repeatedly executed, so that the second CB combination is won at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 26(d). In this case, the transition to the second CB state ST3 does not occur by preventing the second CB winning from being established. In addition, in a state where the second CB combination is won, a game with the number of bets of "2" as shown in FIG. This is the period during which the prize can be established.

After that, at the timing t3, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeatedly executed as shown in FIG. 26(a). Even if the 2nd CB role is won, the 2nd CB win will not be established if the game with the number of bets "3" is executed, and the 1st CB role will be won if the 2nd CB role is won. never do. Therefore, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 26(e), there is a period during which CB winning is not possible. Further, when the game with the bet number of "2" is executed, the opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 does not occur, but when the game with the bet number of "3" is executed, the second section is not generated. Since an opportunity to shift to SC2 may occur, it is possible to shift to the second section SC2 at timing t3 as shown in FIG. 26(g).

After that, a transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t4, so that the second section SC2 is entered as shown in FIG. , the game is completed in the second section SC2.

After that, at the timing of t5, a game with a bet number of "2" is executed as shown in FIG. 26(b). In this case, since the game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination, the situation is such that the second CB winning can be established as shown in FIG. 26(e). Also, even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26(h). After that, when the second CB winning is established at the timing of t6, the state becomes the second CB state ST3 as shown in FIG. 26(f). Even if the game in the second CB state ST3 is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26(h).

Next, a case where the game with the number of bets of "3" is repeated from the timing after the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed will be described.

At timing t7, which is the timing after the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, a game with a bet number of "3" is started as shown in FIG. 26(a). In this case, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the game section is the first section SC1, and the state is the normal game state ST1. When a game in which the bet number is "3" is executed, a transition to the second section SC2 may occur. It is a transition period. After that, a transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t8, so that the second section SC2 is entered as shown in FIG. , the game is completed in the second section SC2.

After that, the game with the number of bets of "3" is repeatedly executed, so that the first CB combination is won at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 26(c). Also, in a state where the first CB combination is won, a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed as shown in FIG. This is the period during which the prize can be established. After that, when the first CB winning is established at the timing of t10, the state becomes the first CB state ST2 as shown in FIG. 26(f). Even if the game in the first CB state ST2 is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26(h).

After that, at the timing of t11, the first CB state ST2 ends as shown in FIG. 26(f). Even after the first CB state ST2 ends, the second section SC2 continues as shown in FIG. If so, it is treated as a game completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26(h).

Next, a case where the game with the number of bets of "2" is repeated from the timing after the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed will be described.

At timing t12, which is the timing after the processing for clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105), a game with a bet number of "2" is started as shown in FIG. 26(b). In this case, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the game section is the first section SC1, and the state is the normal game state ST1. Then, the game with the number of bets of "2" is repeatedly executed, so that the second CB combination is won at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 26(d). In this case, the transition to the second CB state ST3 does not occur by preventing the second CB winning from being established. Also, in a situation where the second CB combination is won, a game with a bet number of "2" is executed as shown in FIG. This is the period during which the prize can be established. Note that when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, there is no opportunity to shift to the second section SC2, so as shown in FIG. not. After that, when the second CB win is established at the timing of t14, the second CB state ST3 is entered from the timing of t14 to the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 26(f).

Next, the contents of various notifications executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of game media bet will be described.

As described above, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states that are disadvantageous to the player. By executing a game in which the number of bets is "3", it is possible to aim for the occurrence of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. In this case, the slot machine 10 is configured to notify that the second CB combination is not won and that the third CB combination is won.

FIGS. 27(a) to 27(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of the information related to the winning state of the first CB and second CB winning combinations executed by the image display device 63. FIG.

In a situation where the game can be executed and a situation in which the game is being executed, a moving image of the predetermined character image G11 is displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIGS. 27(a) to 27(c). . In this case, when neither the first CB nor the second CB win is won, a non-internal notification image G12 is displayed in a partial area of the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 27(a). . The non-internal notification image G12 is displayed in a corner portion of the image display device 63 so as not to overlap the predetermined character image G11 in the front-rear direction. The display of the non-internal notification image G12 is maintained when the situation continues in which neither the first CB winning nor the second CB winning is won.

As the non-internal notification image G12, a non-internal explicit image G21 indicating that neither the first CB nor the second CB winning combination has been won, and neither the first CB or second CB combination has been won. A non-internal game number image G22 indicating the number of games executed in the situation is displayed. A character image of "returning" is specifically displayed as the non-explicit internal image G21. This clearly indicates that neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won.

As the non-internally played game number image G22, specifically, a character image indicating the number of games executed in a situation where neither the first CB nor the second CB win has been won, such as "010 game", is displayed. . In this case, after the partial clearing process (step S104) or the full clearing process (step S105) of the main side RAM 74 is executed, the first game in the situation where neither the first CB nor the second CB is won is played. Until the game is completed, "000 games" is displayed as the non-internally played game number image G22. In addition, after the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is completed, until the first game is completed in a situation where neither the first CB hand nor the second CB hand is won, the non-internally consumed game number image G22 is displayed. "000 games" is displayed. After that, the number of games displayed as the non-internally consumed game number image G22 each time one game is executed, regardless of whether the game has a bet number of "3" or the game has a bet number of "2". 1 is added.

Winning the second CB role in a game where the number of bets is "2" in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won, and the state of winning the second CB role is achieved. As shown in b), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is ended. In this case, the display of the predetermined character image G11 is continued, but the image display device 63 does not display an image clearly indicating that the second CB combination has been won.

Winning the first CB role in a game where the number of bets is "3" in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won, and the winning state of the first CB role is achieved. As shown in c), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is terminated. In this case, the first internal clear image G13 that clearly indicates that the first CB win has been won is displayed in a partial area of the image display device 63 . The first internal explicit image G13 is displayed in a corner portion of the image display device 63 so as not to overlap the predetermined character image G11 in the front-rear direction. The display of the first internal clear image G13 is maintained when the winning state of the first CB combination continues. Then, when the first CB winning is established and the game state shifts to the first CB state ST2, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 ends.

In the first CB state ST2, the image display device 63 displays the CB state. In addition, in the second CB state ST3, the image display device 63 also displays the CB state. Although the specific content of the display during the CB state is arbitrary, for example, the entire display surface of the image display device 63 may be dimly displayed while the predetermined character image G11 is being displayed on the image display device 63. . Also, an image showing the remaining number of payouts of game media required until the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends may be displayed.

In addition to the above notifications, various types of bet number related notifications are executed as notifications related to winning states of the first CB and second CB hands. Specifically, as the bet number-related notification, in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won, reel By the timing when the stop operations of 32L, 32M, and 32R become valid, notification of the winning of the second CB combination is executed. The manner of execution of notification of the response to the winning of the second CB role is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "won the second CB role" is output from the speaker 62. FIG. The notification corresponding to the winning of the 2nd CB role is also generated after the game in which the 2nd CB role is won, when the game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the winning state of the 2nd CB role.

In the winning state of the second CB combination, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, a notification corresponding to 2 bets is executed. The manner of execution of the 2-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "2 bets are offered" is output from the speaker 62. FIG. The 2-bet notification indicates that the number of bets is "2" if a game with the number of bets of "2" is repeated without intervening games with the number of bets of "3" in the winning state of the second CB combination. It does not occur after the second game of the game.

In a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, the 3-bet correspondence notification is executed when a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed. The mode of execution of the 3-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "3 bets are paid" is output from the speaker 62. FIG. In the case where neither the first CB nor the second CB is won, the 3-bet notification is repeated without intervening a game with a bet number of "3" and a game with a bet number of "2". In this case, it does not occur in the second and subsequent games in which the number of bets is "3".

In a situation where neither the 1st CB hand nor the 2nd CB hand is won, the stopping operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is valid if the 1st CB hand is won in a game where the number of bets is "3". The notification of the winning of the first CB combination is executed by the timing of . The manner of execution of notification of the response to the winning of the first CB role is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "winning the first CB role" is output from the speaker 62 . However, the notification corresponding to the winning of the 1st CB role is generated only in the game in which the 1st CB role is won, and in the subsequent game in which the 1st CB role is won, the number of bets is "2" and the number of bets is "3". None of the games will run.

In the winning state of the first CB combination, when a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed, the notification corresponding to 2 bets is executed. The manner of execution of the 2-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as '2 bets are being paid' is output from the speaker 62 . The 2-bet notification indicates that the number of bets is "2" if the game with the number of bets of "2" is repeated without intervening the game with the number of bets of "3" in the winning state of the first CB combination. does not occur after the second game of the game.

Next, the execution of various notifications in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of game media bet will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 28(a) shows the execution period of the game with the bet number of "2", FIG. 28(b) shows the execution period of the game with the bet number of "3", and FIG. 28(c) shows the bet number. FIG. 28(d) shows the period during which the notification sound is output when the number of bets is "2", which occurs when the game with the number of bets of "2" is played. FIG. 28(e) shows a period during which the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63, and FIG. (f) shows the period during which the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63, FIG. 28(g) shows the period during which the first CB win is won, and FIG. 28(i) shows the period during which the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is executed, and FIG. 28(j) shows the state during the CB state on the image display device 63. Indicates the period during which the display is being performed.

When the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 is started, the effect execution control is started by the effect side MPU 92 at the timing of t1. In this case, since the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main side RAM 74 has been executed, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. Therefore, at the timing of t1, the non-internal notification image G12 starts to be displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 28(e).

After that, at timing t2, a game with a bet number of "3" is executed as shown in FIG. 28(b). In this case, since a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed in a situation where neither the first CB hand nor the second CB hand is won, the 3-bet compatible notification is supported as shown in FIG. 28(d). A notification sound is output. As a result, it is possible for the player and the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the game with the number of bets of "3" is being executed in a situation where neither the first CB nor the second CB is won. becomes. Also, at the timing of t2, the display content of the non-internally-completed game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "000 game" to "001 game".

At the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed again under the condition that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. However, since this game is a game in which the number of bets is "3" from the second time onward without intervening games in which the number of bets is "2", the 3-bet correspondence notification is not executed. As a result, the 3-bet correspondence notification is repeatedly executed in response to the intentional repetition of the game in which the number of bets is "3" under the condition that neither the first CB nor the second CB is won. It is possible to prevent it from being lost. Also, at the timing of t3, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "001 game" to "002 game".

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed again under the condition that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. In the game, the first CB combination is won as shown in FIG. 28(g). Therefore, at the timing t4, a notification sound corresponding to the notification of the winning of the first CB combination is output as shown in FIG. 28(d). This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the first CB combination has been won. Further, the notification corresponding to the winning of the first CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the game in which the first CB combination is won. This makes it possible for the player or the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the first CB role has been won before the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the game in which the first CB role has been won. . Also, at timing t4, the display content of the non-internally-completed game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "002 game" to "003 game".

After that, the game in which the first CB winning combination is won at the timing t5 ends without the establishment of the first CB winning. In this case, at the timing t5, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. The display of the internal explicit image G13 is started. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the first CB combination has been won.

After that, at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 28(b), a game is executed in which the number of bets is "3" in the winning state of the first CB combination. Then, at timing t7, which is the timing at which the game ends, the first CB win is established as shown in FIGS. 28(g) and 28(i), thereby shifting to the first CB state ST2. In this case, at the timing t7, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. The display during the CB state is started.

After that, at the timing of t8, a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the first CB state ST2. In the game as well, the display during the CB state on the image display device 63 continues as shown in FIG. 28(j). After that, the game with the number of bets of "3" is repeated, so that the first CB state ST2 ends as shown in FIG. 28(i) at the timing of t9. In this case, the display during the CB state on the image display device 63 ends at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 28(j). In addition, since neither the first CB nor the second CB is won, the non-internal notification image G12 starts to be displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 28(e) at the timing of t9. be done. In this case, the display content of the non-internal game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is "000 games".

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 28(a), a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed under the condition that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. At the timing t10, the display content of the non-internally-completed game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "000 game" to "001 game".

After that, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 28(a), the game with the number of bets of "2" is executed again under the condition that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. In the game, the second CB combination is won as shown in FIG. 28(h). Therefore, at the timing t11, a notification sound corresponding to the notification of the winning of the second CB combination is output as shown in FIG. 28(c). This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won. Further, the notification corresponding to winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the game in which the second CB combination is won. This makes it possible for the player or the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won before the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the game in which the second CB role has been won. . Also, at the timing of t11, the display content of the non-internally completed game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "001 game" to "002 game".

After that, the game in which the second CB winning combination is won at the timing t12 ends without the establishment of the second CB winning. In this case, at the timing of t12, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 28(e). This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won.

Thereafter, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 28(a), a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28(c), the notification sound corresponding to the 2-bet notification is output, and the notification sound corresponding to the winning notification of the second CB combination is output again. As a result, it becomes possible for the player and the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the game with the number of bets "2" has been executed in the winning state of the second CB combination, and the second CB combination is won. It is possible to make the player and the manager of the game hall recognize that there is a game hall. In addition, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the game hall manager to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

After that, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 28(a), the game in which the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination is executed again. However, since this game is a game in which the number of bets is "2" from the second time onward without intervening games in which the number of bets is "3", the 2-bet correspondence notification is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the repeated execution of the 2-bet notification in response to the intentional repetition of the game in which the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination. Become. On the other hand, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 28(c), the notification sound corresponding to the notification of the winning of the second CB combination is output again. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won. In addition, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the game hall manager to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 28(b), at timing t15 and timing t16, a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. Since it is originally assumed that a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed when the 2nd CB role is won, the 3-bet support notification and the 2nd CB role are supported for the game. No notification is performed.

After that, at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 28(a), a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28(c), the notification sound corresponding to the 2-bet notification is output, and the notification sound corresponding to the winning notification of the second CB combination is output again. This makes it possible for the player or the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the game with the number of bets "2" has been executed in the winning state of the second CB combination, and the second CB combination is won. It is possible to make the player or the manager of the game hall recognize that the player is there. In addition, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

After that, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 28(a), the game in which the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination is executed again. However, since this game is a game in which the number of bets is "2" from the second time onward without intervening games in which the number of bets is "3", the 2-bet correspondence notification is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the repeated execution of the 2-bet notification in response to the intentional repetition of the game in which the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination. Become. On the other hand, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 28(c), the notification sound corresponding to the notification regarding the winning of the second CB combination is output again. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won. In addition, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

Next, a processing configuration for performing various notifications executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets of game media as described above will be described.

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing internal notification control processing executed by the effect side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. The internal notification control process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short period (for example, a period of 4 milliseconds) by the effect side MPU 92 .

First, it is determined whether or not a supply start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1101). When the supply of operating power is started, the main MPU 72, if no abnormality has occurred in the storage state of the main RAM 74, outputs a power recovery command as a command at the start of supply in the main process (FIG. 10). Send either a full initialization command or a partial initialization command. As already explained, the power recovery command is the address before power-off without executing the partial clear processing (step S104) and the all clear processing (step S105) when no abnormality has occurred in the storage state of the main RAM 74. This is the command sent when returning to The all-initialization command is a command that is transmitted when the all-clearing process (step S105) is executed, as will be described later. The partial initialization command is a command that is transmitted when the partial clear processing (step S104) is executed, as will be described later.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, control processing at the start of supply is executed (step S1102). FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing control processing at the start of supply.

When the all clear processing (step S105) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 72 and the all initialization command is received (step S1201: YES), the non-internal notification image on the image display device 63 The display of G12 is started (step S1202). When the all clear processing (step S105) is executed, all areas of the main side RAM 74 are initialized as will be described in detail later. situation. Therefore, when the all-initialization command is received, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started. In this case, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games".

When the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 72 and the partial initialization command is received (step S1203: YES), the partial initialization command Based on the set information, it is determined whether or not the second CB combination is won (step S1204). When the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, the area in which the second CB winning data is to be stored in the main RAM 74 is not initialized, as will be described in detail later, and the area other than the area ( (including an area where the first CB winning data is stored) is initialized.

If the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, the main side will continue to perform the partial clearing process (step S104) after the supply of operating power is resumed. The state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the RAM 74 is maintained. On the other hand, if the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed after the supply of operating power is resumed. Also, the state in which the second CB winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 is maintained. Information indicating whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 is set in the partial initialization command, as will be described later. Therefore, in step S1204, it is determined whether information indicating that the second CB winning data is stored is included in the partial initialization command.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1205). In this case, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games". When an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, "1" is set to the second CB inside flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1206). The 2nd CB internal medium flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the 2nd CB combination has been won.

If the power recovery command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1207: YES), it is determined whether or not the second CB combination is won based on the information set in the power recovery command (step S1208). As already explained, information indicating whether or not either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 is set in the power recovery command. If the 2nd CB combination is won (step S1208: YES), the 2nd CB inside flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1209).

If the second CB combination is not won (step S1208: NO), it is determined whether or not the first CB combination is won based on the information set in the power recovery command (step S1210). If the first CB combination is not won (step S1210: NO), display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1211). In this case, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games". If the first CB combination is won (step S1210: YES), display of the first internal explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1212). After that, "1" is set to the first CB internal flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1213). The 1st CB internal medium flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the 1st CB combination has been won.

Returning to the description of the internal notification control process (FIG. 29), if the winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), the information set in the winning result command will be used in the current game. It is determined whether or not the 1CB role has been won and the 1CB prize has not been established (step S1104). The main side MPU 72 transmits a winning result command to the effect side MPU 92 in step S813, which is a process executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game in the reel control process (FIG. 20). The winning result command includes information corresponding to the type of winning data stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game, and whether or not a winning has been established in the current game. information, and if a prize has been won in the current game, information on the type of prize that has been established is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, "1" is set to the first CB internal flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S1105), and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is terminated (step S1106). , the display of the first internal explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1107).

In the internal notification control process, when a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), the second CB role is won in this game from the information set in the winning result command, and the second It is determined whether or not 2CB winning has been established (step S1108). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1108, "1" is set in the second CB internal flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S1109), and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is ended (step S1110). .

In the internal notification control process, if a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is further determined whether or not a first CB winning command or a second CB winning command has been received from the main MPU 72. Thus, it is determined whether or not the first CB prize or the second CB prize has been established in the current game (step S1111). As already explained, the main MPU 72 transmits the first CB winning command in step S1005 of the CB processing (FIG. 25) when the first CB winning is established, and when the second CB winning is established, the CB processing A second CB winning command is transmitted in step S1009 of (FIG. 25).

If any of the CB winnings have been established (step S1111: YES), the process of clearing the flag inside the CB is executed (step S1112). In the CB internal flag clearing process, when the first CB internal flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1", the first CB internal flag is cleared to "0", and the second CB internal flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared. If the middle flag is set to "1", the middle flag inside the second CB is cleared to "0". After that, end processing of various displays is executed (step S1113). In the termination process, if the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is terminated, and the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63. If so, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 is terminated. After that, the image display device 63 starts displaying during the CB state (step S1114).

In the internal notification control process, if a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is determined whether or not a CB end command has been received from the main MPU 72. It is determined whether or not the CB states ST2 and ST3 that have been set have ended (step S1115). As already described, the main MPU 72 transmits a CB end command in step S1014 of the CB process (FIG. 25) when the CB states ST2 and ST3 that have been executed are ended.

When the CB states ST2 and ST3 to be executed have ended (step S1115: YES), the display during the CB state on the image display device 63 is ended (step S1116). Thereafter, display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1117).

In the internal notification control process, when a game start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), both the first CB inside flag and the second CB inside flag of the effect side RAM 94 are set to "1". is not set (step S1119 and step S1120: NO), a non-internal medium notification process is executed (step S1121). Also, if a game start command has been received from the master side MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), and if "1" is set in the first CB internal flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1119: YES). , the first CB inside notification processing is executed (step S1122). Also, if a game start command has been received from the master side MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), and if the second CB internal flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1120: YES). , second CB internal medium notification processing is executed (step S1123).

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the non-internal notification process executed in step S1121 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 29).

First, 1 is added to the value of the returning counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1301). The during-returning counter is a counter for specifying the number of games executed after the image display device 63 started displaying the non-internal notification image G12, and is set in the during-returning counter. A number corresponding to the displayed value is displayed as the non-internally completed game number image G22 in the non-internal notification image G12. It should be noted that when the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is started on the image display device 63, the value of the returning counter is cleared to "0". After that, the display content of the non-internal notification image G12 is changed so that the number corresponding to the value set in the returning counter after the addition of 1 is displayed in the non-internal completed game number image G22 in the non-internal notification image G12. Update (step S1302).

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for this game is "3" (step S1303). As already explained, the main MPU 72 transmits the first bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "3" in the setting process at the start (FIG. 15) which is executed when one game is started. (step S603), and if the number of bets for the game is "2", a second bet number command is transmitted (step S604). In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the first bet number command has been received from the main MPU 72 .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, the "3" bet notification processing is executed on condition that "1" is not set in the "3" bet notification completion flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1304: NO). After that (step S1305), the "3" bet notified flag is set to "1" (step S1306). In the "3" bet notification process, there is a 3-bet corresponding notification for notifying that a game with the number of bets of "3" has been executed in a situation where neither the first CB hand nor the second CB hand has been won. make it run. As a result, a message such as, for example, “3 sheets are required” is output from the speaker 62 . The “3” bet notification completion flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the 3-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when a game with the number of bets of “3” is repeated. When the "3" bet notification completion flag is set to "1", the "3" bet notification processing is not executed, so that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. When a game with the number of bets of "3" is repeated in a situation, it is possible to prevent the 3-bet correspondence notification from being repeated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1304, or if the process of step S1306 is executed, whether or not the first CB role has been won in the current game is determined from the information set in the game start command received this time. Determine (step S1307). If the first CB winning combination is won (step S1307: YES), processing for notifying when the first CB is won is executed (step S1308). In the processing for notification when the first CB is won, the notification of the winning of the first CB combination is executed. As a result, a message such as "winning the first CB role" is output from the speaker 62. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S1303, that is, if the number of bets for this game is "2" and the second bet number command has been received from the main side MPU 72, the "3" bet notified flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1309). The "3" bet notified flag is also cleared to "0" when neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won.

After that, it is determined whether or not the second CB role has been won in the current game based on the information set in the game start command received this time (step S1310). If the 2nd CB is won (step S1310: YES), processing for notifying when the 2nd CB is won is executed (step S1311). In the process for notification when the second CB is won, the notification of the winning of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs a message such as "winning the second CB role".

FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the first CB internal medium notification process executed in step S1122 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 29).

First, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1401). As already explained, the main MPU 72 transmits the first bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "3" in the setting process at the start (FIG. 15) which is executed when one game is started. (step S603), and if the number of bets for the game is "2", a second bet number command is transmitted (step S604). In step S1401, it is determined whether or not a second bet number command has been received from the main MPU 72. FIG.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the "2" bet notification processing is executed on condition that "1" is not set in the "2" bet notification completion flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1402: NO). After that (step S1403), the "2" bet notified flag is set to "1" (step S1404). In the "2" bet notification process, a 2-bet corresponding notification for notifying that a game with the number of bets of "2" has been executed in the winning state of the first CB combination is executed. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs a message such as, for example, "Two sheets are required." The “2” bet notification completion flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the 2-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when a game with the number of bets of “2” is repeated. By not executing the "2" bet notification process when the "2" bet notification completion flag is set to "1", the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the first CB combination. It is possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeated when the game is repeated.

When a negative determination is made in step S1401, the "2" bet notified flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1405). The "2" bet notified flag is cleared to "0" even when the first CB combination is won, and is also cleared to "0" when the second CB combination is won.

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the second CB internal medium notification process executed in step S1123 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 29).

First, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1501). As already explained, the main MPU 72 transmits the first bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "3" in the setting process at the start (FIG. 15) which is executed when one game is started. (step S603), and if the number of bets for the game is "2", a second bet number command is transmitted (step S604). In step S1501, it is determined whether or not a second bet number command has been received from the main side MPU 72 .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the "2" bet notification processing is executed on condition that "1" is not set in the "2" bet notification completion flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1502: NO). After that (step S1503), the "2" bet notified flag is set to "1" (step S1504). In the “2” bet notification processing, a 2-bet corresponding notification for notifying that a game with the number of bets of “2” has been executed in the winning state of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs a message such as, for example, "Two sheets are required." The “2” bet notification completion flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the 2-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when a game with the number of bets of “2” is repeated. By not executing the "2" bet notification process when the "2" bet notification completion flag is set to "1", the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination. It is possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeated when the game is repeated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, or if the processing of step S1504 is executed, processing for notifying when the second CB is won is executed (step S1505). In the process for notification when the second CB is won, the notification of the winning of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs a message such as "winning the second CB role". As described above, by executing the process for notifying when the second CB is won, in the state where the second CB is won, every time a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB is made. will be executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1501, the "2" bet notified flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1506). The "2" bet notified flag is cleared to "0" even when the first CB combination is won, and is also cleared to "0" when the second CB combination is won.

Next, the contents of the areas of the main RAM 74 to be initialized in each of the partial clear processing (step S104) and the full clear processing (step S105) in the main MPU 72 will be described.

FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the main RAM 74. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 34, each storage area of the main RAM 74 is set with an address. The address is set as serial number information. Specifically, the address "00FF" is set as the start address, the address "01FF" is set as the next address, and the address "02FF" is set as the next address. The addresses are set so that the numbers are consecutive even after that.

A second CB winning data area, which is an area for storing the second CB winning data, is set as a storage area corresponding to the start address "00FF". In the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the combination, when the index value IV to which the 2nd CB winning data is set is won, the 2nd CB winning data is set in the 2nd CB winning data area, and when the 2nd CB winning is established, , the second CB winning data is cleared from the second CB winning data area.

A first CB winning data area, which is an area for storing the first CB winning data, is set as a storage area corresponding to "01FF", which is the next order to the start address "00FF". In the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination, when the index value IV to which the first CB winning data is set is won, the first CB winning data is set in the first CB winning data area, and when the first CB winning is established, clears the first CB winning data from the first CB winning data area.

A setting value storage area, which is an area for storing setting values to be set, is set as a storage area corresponding to "02FF" which is next in order to "01FF". The set value selected in the set value update process (step S106) of the main process (FIG. 10) is stored in the set value storage area.

FIG. 35(a) is a flow chart showing the all clear processing executed in step S105 of the main processing (FIG. 10).

First, "00FF", which is the start address of the main RAM 74, is set as the target address (step S1601). Thereafter, a clear execution process is executed to clear the storage area corresponding to the current target address in the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S1602).

After that, an address update process is executed to set the target address to the next address in the address of the main RAM 74 (step S1603). As a result, if the target address was "00FF", which is the start address, the target address becomes "01FF", and if the target address was "01FF", the target address becomes "02FF". ”.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the target address updated by the address update processing corresponds to the end address (step S1604). The end address is an address corresponding to the next in order with respect to the final address set in the main RAM 74 . If a negative determination is made in step S1604, the process returns to step S1602. By repeating the processing of steps S1602 to S1604 in this way, all storage areas of the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, initial setting is executed for the storage area targeted for clear execution processing in step S1602 in the current all clear processing. Thereafter, an all initialization command indicating that all clear processing has been executed for the main side RAM 74 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1606).

FIG. 35(b) is a flow chart showing the partial clear processing executed in step S104 of the main processing (FIG. 10).

First, "01FF", which is the address following the start address of the main RAM 74, is set as the target address (step S1701). As a result, the second CB winning data area, which is a storage area corresponding to "00FF", which is the start address of the main RAM 74, is excluded from the execution target of "0" clearing and is also excluded from the execution target of the initial setting process (step S1705). are also excluded. Thereafter, a clear execution process is executed to clear the storage area corresponding to the current target address in the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S1702).

After that, an address update process is executed to set the target address to the next address in the address of the main RAM 74 (step S1703). As a result, if the previous target address was "01FF", which is the address next in order to the start address of the main RAM 74, the target address becomes "02FF", and the previous target address becomes "02FF". , the target address is "03FF".

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the target address updated by the address updating process corresponds to the end address (step S1704). The end address is an address corresponding to the next in order with respect to the final address set in the main RAM 74 . If a negative determination is made in step S1704, the process returns to step S1702. By repeating the processing of steps S1702 to S1704 in this manner, all the storage areas of the main side RAM 74 other than the second CB winning data area, which is the storage area corresponding to the start address of the main side RAM 74, are stored. "0" is cleared.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, initial setting is executed for the storage area targeted for clear execution processing in step S1702 in the current partial clear processing. After that, a partial initialization command indicating that the partial clear processing has been executed for the main side RAM 74 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1706). In this case, it is specified whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and if the second CB winning data is stored, a partial initialization command is issued with the information corresponding thereto set. sent.

Next, how the main MPU 72 executes the partial clearing process (step S104) and the all clearing process (step S105) will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 36(a) shows a period during which operating power is supplied to the main MPU 72, FIG. 36(b) shows a period during which main processing (FIG. 10) is executed in the main MPU 72, c) shows the execution timing of the setting update start operation in which the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is being turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is not pressed. FIG. 36(d) shows the execution of the RAM clearing operation in which the power switch 55 is turned ON while the setting key insertion hole 57 is being turned ON by the setting key and the reset button 56 is pressed. 36(e) shows a period during which the main MPU 72 is partially clearing (step S104), and FIG. 36(f) is a full clearing process (step S105) by the main MPU 72. is executed, FIG. 36(g) shows the period in which the first CB win is won, and FIG. 36(h) shows the period in which the second CB win is won.

First, when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started in a state where the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and the main side MPU 72 executes a partial clear process (FIG. 35(b)). will be explained.

At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 36(c), the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key is being turned on by the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the reset button 56 is not being pressed. When the setting update start operation is performed, the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. Main processing (FIG. 10) is started in the MPU 72, and after that, as shown in FIG. is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 36(h), the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started while the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. A state in which winning data is stored is maintained. Note that the set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t3.

By executing the partial clearing process (FIG. 35(b)) when the setting update start operation is performed as described above, the operating power to the main side MPU 72 is reduced in the winning state of the second CB combination. Even if the set value update process (step S106) is executed when the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of is stopped, after the set value update process (step S106) is executed Also, it is possible to maintain the winning state of the second CB combination. Thereby, the manager of the game hall does not repeatedly execute the game with the number of bets "2" before the opening of the game hall to make the second CB combination winning state every time the set value is changed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that is unavoidable.

Next, in a state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, and the main MPU 72 executes all clear processing (FIG. 35(a)). A case will be described.

At the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 36(d), the power switch 55 is turned on while the reset button 56 is pressed while the setting key is turned on as shown in FIG. 36(d). 36(a), the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started at the timing of t4, and the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 36(b). The main processing (FIG. 10) is started at , and the main MPU 72 performs all clear processing (FIG. 35A) as shown in FIG. be done. In this case, as shown in FIG. 36(h), the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started with the second CB winning data stored in the main side RAM 74. Data will be erased. Note that the set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t6.

When the RAM clearing operation is performed as described above, the all clearing process (FIG. 35(a)) is executed to erase the second CB winning data. When (a)) is executed, it is possible to create a situation in which neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. Then, when the game with the number of bets "3" is executed without winning the second CB combination, the first CB prize is established and the player can shift to the first CB state ST2 which is disadvantageous to the player. It will happen. As a result, it is possible to suppress the profit obtained by illegally performing the all clear processing (FIG. 35(a)).

Next, with the first CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, and the main MPU 72 executes a partial clear process (FIG. 35(b)). I will explain the case where

At the timing t7, as shown in FIG. 36(c), the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key is being turned on by the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the reset button 56 is not being pressed. When the setting update start operation is performed, the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. The main processing (FIG. 10) is started by the MPU 72, and the partial clear processing is performed by the main MPU 72 (FIG. 35(b)) as shown in FIG. is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 36(g), the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started with the first CB winning data stored in the main side RAM 74. Data will be erased. Note that the set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t9.

Even if the partial clearing process (FIG. 35(b)) is executed when the setting update start operation is performed as described above, the first CB winning data is erased, so that in the original game It is possible to cancel the state in which the first CB winning data is stored, which is not normal, when changing the set value.

<Regarding the second section SC2>
Next, the second section SC2 will be explained. First, the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The first control process of the game section is executed in step S711, which is a process executed after completion of the win/loss determination of the win in the win lottery process (FIG. 16).

First, it is determined whether or not the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1801). The second section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is the second section SC2 in the main side MPU 72, and when "1" is set in the second section flag, the second section SC2 , and the first section SC1 is when the value of the second section flag is "0". If "1" is set in the second section flag (step S1801: YES), the processing after step S1802 is not executed. As a result, in the case of the second section SC2, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806 and the lottery process for the number of unlocked games in step S1810 are not executed.

If the second interval flag is not set to "1" (step S1801: NO), it is determined whether the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1802). If the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1802: YES), the processing after step S1803 is not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806, and step S1810 The lottery process for the number of unlocked games is not executed.

When the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S1802: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3". Then, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1803). If the number of bets for this game is "2" (step S1803: NO), the processing after step S1804 is not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the first section SC1, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct lottery process in step S1806, and the cancellation game in step S1810. The number lottery process will not be executed.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1803: YES), it is determined whether or not any index value IV has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current combination (step S1804). ). If the lottery process (FIG. 16) for this combination is lost (step S1804: NO), the processes after step S1805 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is lost in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the process for setting it to the second section SC2 in step S1805 and the direct hit lottery process in step S1806 In addition, the lottery process for the number of unlocked games in step S1810 is not executed.

In the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current role, if any index value IV is won (step S1804: YES), the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the main RAM 74 The continuous game number counter 74c (see FIG. 9) and the total winning number counter 74d (see FIG. 9) provided in the are each cleared to "0" (step S1805). The second section SC2 is set by setting the second section flag to "1".

The number-of-continued-games counter 74c is for specifying the number of times the game is executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without intervening the first section SC1. is a counter of When the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the second interval SC2, the reached game is determined even in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. , the second section SC2 ends, and the state shifts to the first section SC1, which is the normal game state ST1.

The total acquisition number counter 74d informs the main side MPU 72 of the restricted total net increase number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without intervening the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying As already explained, the restricted total net increase in the number of game media refers to the “total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 continues (the total number of game media awarded "0" when the game is not running)" to "the total number of game media consumed for executing the game while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when the game is not running) is the predetermined difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is set as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets increases by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value. When the value of the total win counter 74d reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 cards) in the second section SC2, even during the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the game reached , the second section SC2 ends, and the state shifts to the first section SC1, which is the normal game state ST1.

After that, direct hit lottery processing is executed (step S1806). In the direct hit lottery process, a direct hit lottery table provided in the main side ROM 73 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the main side RAM 74 are used to determine by lottery whether or not to win a direct hit in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. do. In the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the role in this game, if the index value IV=11 is won, there is a 2% chance that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be won directly, and the index value IV=12 will be won. If the index value IV=13, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be directly hit with a probability of 10%, and the index value IV=13. If 14 is won, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is won directly with a probability of 5%, and if the index value IV=15 is won, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is won directly with a probability of 2%. . In this case, the lower the probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the higher the probability of winning a direct hit in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

If the direct hit lottery process results in a direct hit win in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1807: YES), the first transition confirmation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1808). The first transition confirmation flag is for the main MPU 72 to specify that transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has been won in the direct lottery process (step S1806) executed when transitioning to the second section SC2. is a flag. When the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1", a process is executed to shift the game state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when the current game ends.

After that, lighting processing of the section display section 67 is executed (step S1809). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that it is the second section SC2.

When the direct hit lottery process does not result in a direct hit win in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1807: NO), the lottery process for the number of unlocked games is executed (step S1810). The number of unlocked games is the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs in the transition lottery process (step S2112), which will be described later, when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not won. It is a counter for specifying In the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, first, the lottery table for the number of unlocked games pre-stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 . Then, the number of unlocked games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter against the lottery table of the number of unlocked games. In this case, one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of unlocked games. In addition, the selection probabilities for each number of unlocked games are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the probability of selecting the number of unlocked games with a large number of games is set high, or the probability of selecting the number of unlocked games with a small number of games is set high. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which After executing the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, the number of unlocked games selected in the lottery process for the number of unlocked games is set in the unlocked game number counter 74e (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1811). The unlocked game number counter 74e is a counter for specifying the number of remaining unlocked games in the main MPU 72 .

Thereafter, a lighting lottery process for the section display section 67 is executed (step S1812). In the lighting lottery process of the section display unit 67, the lighting lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to set the second section SC2 from the beginning. A lottery determines whether the section display section 67 is to be lit (that is, to be lit immediately) or that the section display section 67 is to be to be lit (that is, standby for lighting) upon transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 thereafter. In the lottery process (Fig. 16) for the role in this game, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 10 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 50%, and standby lighting is selected with a probability of 50%. is selected, and if the index value IV=11 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 65%, and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 35%. is selected with a probability of 62% and the standby mode is selected with a probability of 38%. When lighting standby is selected and index value IV=14 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 75% and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 25% and index value IV=15 is won. , the immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 70%, and the lighting standby is selected with a probability of 30%. Lighting standby is selected with a probability, and when index value IV=17 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 30% and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 70%. In this case, the index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of selecting immediate lighting.

When immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S1812) of the section display section 67 (step S1813: YES), the lighting process of the section display section 67 is executed (step S1814). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that it is the second section SC2.

On the other hand, when lighting standby is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S1812) of the section display unit 67 (step S1813: NO), the lighting standby flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" ( step S1815). The lighting standby flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that switching of the section display portion 67 from the off state to the lighting state is waiting in the second section SC2.

Next, the second control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second control process of the game section is executed in step S906 in the corresponding process (FIG. 21) at the end of the game. As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game. is executed after all

When "1" is set to the second section flag of the main side RAM74 and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S1901: YES), the state of the flag of the main side RAM74 is confirmed. It is determined whether or not the game state is the end preparation state ST5 (step S1902). The end preparation state ST5 is a case where the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, and the second section SC2 ends when the subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1 occurs. It is a game state that shifts to .

If it is in the end preparation state ST5 (step S1902: YES), it is determined whether or not the end preparation completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1903). The termination preparation completion flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the termination preparation state ST5. In the pseudo-bonus processing (step S905) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 21), the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 0, and the second interval is set when the subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1 is performed. When it is specified that the SC2 is to end, a flag is set to enter the end preparation state ST5 and the end preparation completion flag is cleared to "0".

If the end preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S1903: NO), the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S1904), and then the processing from step S1905 is executed. If the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S1903: YES), it means that one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST5. In this case, a process for ending the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the initialization process for the second section SC2 is executed (step S1914). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the user stays in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 including the counter for storing the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is maintained. By clearing various data indicating that, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1. Also, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the unlocked game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, even if the current game state is any one of the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state ST3, the remaining number of unlocked games (that is, the number of ceiling games) at that time is invalidated, and after that, The number of remaining games to be unlocked is reset at the time of a new shift to the second section SC2. Note that even during the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization processing of the second section SC2 is executed and the second section SC2 ends, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 continues without being terminated.

After that, when the section display section 67 is in the lighting state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state (step S1915). As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 is terminated. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1916). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 executes the effect corresponding to the end of the second section SC2.

If it is not the end preparation state ST5 (step S1902: NO), or if the process of step S1904 is executed, the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1905). As already explained, the number-of-continued-games counter 74c informs the main MPU 72 of the number of times the game has been executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c after adding 1 is equal to or greater than 1500, which is the upper limit number of games (step S1906). If the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is 1500 or more, it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1906, and processing for ending the second section SC2 in steps S1914 and S1916 is executed. The processing contents of steps S1914 to S1916 have already been described. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is in the middle, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is forcibly ended and the normal game state ST1 is entered.

If the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S1906: NO), is any of the first-chance replay wins, second-chance replay wins, and normal replay wins achieved in the current game? It is determined whether or not (step S1907). In this case, even if the number of bets in the current game is either "2" or "3", the determination in step S1907 is made, and the current game is normal game state ST1, first CB state ST2, second CB. Whether the game state is the state ST3 or the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is subject to the determination in step S1907.

If none of the replay wins have been established (step S1907: NO), the number of bets for this game (that is, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total winning number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S1908). . In this case, even if a replay win was established in the previous game and the current game is a game corresponding to a replay due to the establishment of the replay win, the number of bets for this game (that is, the bet number setting counter 74a value) is subtracted from the total win counter 74d.

As already explained, the total acquisition number counter 74d counts the total net increase in number of game media with restrictions from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1. This is a counter for identification by the main MPU 72 . As already explained, the restricted total net increase in the number of game media refers to the “total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 continues (the total number of game media awarded "0" when the game is not running)" to "the total number of game media consumed for executing the game while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when the game is not running) is the predetermined difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is set as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets increases by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value.

After that, in this game, any small role winning prize (1st to 9th supplementary prize, 1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, special bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize) It is determined whether or not winning and cherry winning have been established (step S1909). In this case, regardless of whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3", the determination in step S1909 is made, and the current game is in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB. Whether the game state is the state ST3 or the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is subject to the determination of step S1909. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1909, the number of game media provided in the current game is added to the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S1910).

When a negative determination is made in step S1909, or when the process of step S1910 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 is 0 or more (step S1911). When the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S1911: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S1912).

As described above, in step S1908, the number of bets for the current number of games is subtracted from the total winning number counter 74d. Therefore, for example, in the game in the normal game state ST1 immediately after the transition to the second section SC2, any small win is established. Otherwise, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d will be less than zero. In this case, by making a negative determination in step S1911, the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S1912. As a result, "the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" in the situation where no game medium is awarded)" to "the second section When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute the game while SC2 is being continued (“0” when the game is not being executed) is set as the predetermined difference number, Using the minimum value of the predetermined difference number as a predetermined reference value, the total net increase number with limitation of game media, which is the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, is measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d. becomes possible.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1907, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1911, or if the process of step S1912 is executed, does the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceed the upper limit net increase number "2400"? It is determined whether or not (step S1913). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1913, and processing for ending the second interval SC2 is executed in steps S1914 to S1916. The processing contents of steps S1914 to S1916 have already been described. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and if the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is in the middle, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is forcibly ended and the normal game state ST1 is entered.

Here, if any of the replay prizes are established, affirmative determination is made in step S1907, and the processing of steps S1908 to S1912 is not executed. In a game in which a replay winning prize is established, the game media owned by the player at the start of the game is used for setting bets, but as a profit from the replay winning establishment, the same number of bets as in the game in which the replay winning prize was established A new game can be played again with the number of bets. In other words, the number of game media owned by the player does not change in the game in which the replay winning has been established. In this case, by not executing the processing of steps S1908 to S1912 in a game in which a replay winning has been established, in a game in which the number of game media owned by the player does not change, the value of the total winning number counter 74d is calculated. It is possible to omit the execution of processing for changing , and it is possible to omit the execution of useless processing.

On the other hand, even in a game in which a replay win has been established, it is determined in step S1913 whether or not the value of the total winning number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400". As a result, even though the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d had already exceeded the upper limit net increase number of "2400" in the game prior to the game in which the replay winning was established, the second Even if the initialization process of the section SC2 is not executed, it is specified that the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds "2400" which is the upper limit net increase number in the game in which the subsequent replay winning is established. , and the initialization process of the second section SC2 can be executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1913, ending handling processing is executed (step S1917). FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the ending handling process.

First, it is determined whether or not the ending flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2001). The ending flag indicates that there is a high possibility that the number of times the game is executed in the second section SC2, which is measured using the continuous game number counter 74c, will reach the upper limit number of games, or is measured using the total winning number counter 74d. This is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that there is a high possibility that the total number of net increases with restrictions on the number of game media being played will reach the upper limit number of net increases.

If the ending flag is not set to "1" (step S2001: NO), the sum of the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c and the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter provided in the main-side RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the first reference number of games. It is determined whether or not (step S2002). The pseudo-bonus continuation counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The first reference number of games is set to 1400 games, which is the number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2. Further, whether or not the result obtained by adding the value obtained by multiplying the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter by the expected acquisition value of the game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is equal to or larger than the first standard acquisition number. (step S2003). The expected acquisition value of game media in one game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is about five. The first reference acquisition number is set to 2100 sheets, which is less than the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2002 or step S2003, the ending flag is set to "1" (step S2004). When the ending flag is set to "1", details will be described later, but in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continuous games is not added, and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and the normal game state ST1 is entered. In the case of transition, the second section SC2 is certainly completed and the transition is made to the first section SC1. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to satisfy the ending condition of the second section SC2, and in a situation in which the ending condition has already been established in relation to the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It is possible to prevent further addition of the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

Thereafter, on condition that the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S2005: YES), an ending command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2006). Upon receiving the ending command, the effect-side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to perform the effect in an execution mode corresponding to the ending period. The situation in which the ending flag is set to "1" basically occurs in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, but it can also occur in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. In this case, although the ending flag is set to "1", the game contents are not changed, and furthermore, the effect execution mode is not changed.

<Regarding normal game state ST1>
Next, the processing contents in the normal game state ST1 will be explained. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an advantageous lottery process executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game. The advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is a step that is executed after the win/loss determination is completed in the win lottery process (FIG. 16) and before the first control process (step S711) of the game section. It is executed in S710.

First, it is determined whether or not the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2101). As already explained, the second section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is the second section SC2 in the main side MPU 72, and the second section flag may be set to "1". The second section SC2 is the first section SC1 when the value of the second section flag is "0". If the second interval flag is not set to "1" (step S2101: NO), the processing after step S2102 is not executed. As a result, when it is the first section SC1, the processing for shifting the game state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 after step S2106 is not executed.

If the second interval flag is set to "1" (step S2101: YES), and if the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S2102: YES), the pseudo-bonus processing at the start of the game is executed. (step S2103). The pseudo-bonus processing at the start of the game will be described later. Even if the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", if the gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the affirmative determination is made in step S2102. make a negative judgment.

When the second interval flag is set to "1" (step S2101: YES) and the gaming state is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S2102: NO), the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not it is in the second CB state ST3 (step S2104). If the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2104: YES), the processing after step S2105 is not executed. As a result, even if it is the second section SC2, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing for shifting the gaming state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 after step S2106 is not executed. .

When the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S2104: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet amount setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3". Then, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S2105). If the number of bets for this game is "2" (step S2105: NO), the processing after step S2106 is not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the second section SC2, the processing for shifting the gaming state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 after step S2106 is not executed.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S2105: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c is equal to or greater than the second reference number of games (step S2106), and the total win It is determined whether or not the value of the number counter 74d is greater than or equal to the second reference acquisition number (step S2107). As already described, the number-of-continued-games counter 74c informs the main MPU 72 of the number of times the game has been executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying When the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the second interval SC2, the reached game is determined even in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. , the second section SC2 ends, and the first section SC1 enters the normal game state ST1. In addition, as already explained, the total acquisition number counter 74d indicates the restricted total net increase of game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying the number of sheets by the main MPU 72 . As already explained, the restricted total net increase in the number of game media refers to the “total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 continues (the total number of game media awarded "0" when the game is not running)" to "the total number of game media consumed for executing the game while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when the game is not running) is the predetermined difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is set as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets increases by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value. In the second section SC2, when the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 cards), the game reached even during the pseudo-bonus state ST4. , the second section SC2 ends, and the first section SC1 enters the normal game state ST1.

The second reference number of games is set as the number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games of 1500 games in the second section SC2 and greater than the first reference number of games of 1400 games. is 1450 games. The second reference acquisition number is set to be less than 2400, which is the upper limit net increase in the second section SC2, and larger than the first reference acquisition number of 2,100, specifically 2150. It is a sheet.

If the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is equal to or greater than the second reference number of games (step S2106: YES), or if the value of the total win number counter 74d is equal to or larger than the second reference number of wins (step S2107: YES), the main "1" is set to the third transition confirmation flag provided in the side RAM 74 (step S2108). The third transition confirmation flag indicates that the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is greater than or equal to the second reference number of games, or that the restricted total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2 is greater than or equal to the second reference acquisition number. This is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 whether or not the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed due to the fact that

When the third transition determination flag is set to "1", a process is executed to transition the game state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when the current game ends. That is, in the normal game state ST1, when the pre-end period, which is a period in which the fulfillment of the ending condition of the second section SC2 is near, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is forced. As a result, it is possible to provide the benefit of generating the pseudo-bonus state ST4 for reaching the pre-end period in the normal game state ST1. 50 games are set as the number of continuous games at the start of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, which is started when the third transition determination flag is set to "1". The number of continuous games set at the start is the number of games that is the difference between 1500 games, which is the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2, and 1450 games, which is the second reference number of games. In addition, since the expected acquisition value of game media in one game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is about 5 as already explained, the product of the number of continuous games set at the start and the expected acquisition value is the second interval. The difference between 2400, which is the upper limit net increase number of SC2, and 2150, which is the second reference acquisition number, is the same or substantially the same. In addition, since the second reference number of games is set as the number of games larger than the first reference number of games, and the second reference number of wins is set as the number of sheets larger than the first reference number of wins, the third transition is confirmed. In the pseudo-bonus state ST4 triggered by setting the flag to "1", the ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is already set to "1" at the start of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. When the ending flag is set to "1", as already described, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is set to a state in which the remaining number of continuous games is not added, and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and the normal game state is reached. In the case of shifting to ST1, the second section SC2 is certainly completed and the transition to the first section SC1 is performed. Therefore, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 started when the third transition confirmation flag is set to "1" is basically the second section SC2 when the number of continuous games set at the start is completed. The ending condition is established, and when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the state shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

After executing the process of step S2108, various clear processes are executed (step S2109). In various clearing processes, the values of the second transition confirmation flag and the transition standby counter provided in the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0". The second transition confirmation flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112) described later, and the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1" in the transition standby counter. This is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transition standby games (specifically, 5 games) has been completed. In the transition lottery process (step S2112), the transition lottery process (step S2112) not only sets the second transition confirmation flag to "1" but also sets a value corresponding to the number of transition standby games in the transition standby counter, thereby causing the second transition. The value of the transition waiting counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in a situation where the determination flag is set to "1". Then, when the value of the transition standby counter becomes "0" in a situation where "1" is set to the second transition confirmation flag, the game state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, after the transition lottery process (step S2112) wins the transition, the number of transition standby games is consumed, and the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs. In this case, when the third transition confirmation flag is set to "1" as described above, even if the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1" at that time, the second transition confirmation flag is "0" is cleared. As a result, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 triggered by setting the third transition confirmation flag to "1" is changed to the pseudo-bonus state triggered by the second transition confirmation flag being set to "1". It becomes possible to give priority to the occurrence of ST4.

When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is less than the second reference number of games and the value of the total win number counter 74d is less than the second reference number of wins (steps S2106 and S2107: NO), the second On the condition that "1" is not set to the transition confirmation flag (step S2110: NO), whether or not any of the index values IV = 11 to 15 was won in the lottery process (Fig. 16) for the current role. (step S2111). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2111, shift lottery processing is executed (step S2112). In the transition lottery process, a transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine by lottery whether to transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) of the role in this game, if the index value IV=11 is won, there is a probability of 20% that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be won, and the index value IV=12 will be won. If the index value IV=13, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is won with a probability of 40%, and the index value IV=13. If 14 is won, transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is won with a 30% probability, and if index value IV=15 is won, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is won with a 20% probability. . In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of winning a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

In the transition lottery process, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 transition is won (step S2113: YES), the second transition confirmation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2114), and the main side A value corresponding to the number of transition standby games (specifically, 5 games) is set in the transition standby counter provided in the RAM 74 (step S2115). The second transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition has been won in the transition lottery process (step S2112). This is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transition standby games (specifically, 5 games) has been completed after being set. In the transition lottery process (step S2112), the transition lottery process (step S2112) not only sets the second transition confirmation flag to "1" but also sets a value corresponding to the number of transition standby games in the transition standby counter, thereby causing the second transition. The value of the transition waiting counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in a situation where the determination flag is set to "1". Then, when the value of the transition standby counter becomes "0" in a situation where "1" is set to the second transition confirmation flag, the game state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, after the transition lottery process (step S2112) wins the transition, the number of transition standby games is consumed, and the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs.

Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is executed at step S904 in the corresponding process (FIG. 21) at the end of the game. As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, so the normal processing also stops all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from rotating in one game. executed later.

When "1" is set in the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S2201: YES), "1" is set in the first transition determination flag of the main side RAM 74. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S2202). At the start of the current game, when the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred and the direct hit lottery process (step S1806) executed at the time of determining the transition is a direct hit winning, the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1".

If "1" is set in the first transition determination flag (step S2202: YES), the first start setting process is executed (step S2203). In the first start setting process, the pseudo-bonus state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the pseudo-bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74 indicates the number of initial continuation games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Set a value corresponding to 40 games. The pseudo-bonus state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It is a counter for specifying in .

After that, the first start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2204). The first start command is a command indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has newly started in a situation where the ending flag of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1". Further, the first start command includes information indicating that the current initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 40 games. In the situation where the ending flag is set to "1", as already explained, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is in a state where the remaining number of continuous games is not added. Therefore, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started in a situation where the ending flag is not set to "1", the remaining number of continuous games can be added in the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

When receiving the first start command, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, on the image display device 63, a moving image corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is displayed, and a display indicating the number of remaining games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the number of game media obtained in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are displayed. is displayed. FIG. 42(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the first start command is received.

As shown in FIG. 42(a), the image display device 63 displays a moving image corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in which the ending flag is not set to "1". G31, the number-of-games image G32 indicating the number of remaining games to be played in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the number-of-acquisitions image G33 indicating the number of game media obtained by the player in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are displayed. In the first effect image G31, a moving image display is performed in which a predetermined character image is displayed in front of a predetermined background image, and the display modes of the predetermined background image and the predetermined character image change. In the game number image G32, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started, the initial number of continued games is displayed, and after that, every time one game is completed and the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is decremented by one. One is subtracted from the number displayed in the number-of-games image G32. Further, when an addition to the remaining number of continuous games occurs in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a number corresponding to the number of games to be added is added to the number displayed in the number-of-games image G32. In the winning number image G33, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started, "0 cards won" is displayed. increases, the increased number of game media is added to the number displayed in the acquired number image G33.

Returning to the description of the normal processing (FIG. 41), if the first transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2202: NO), the third transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". (step S2205). As already explained, the third transition confirmation flag indicates that the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the second reference number of games, or that the total net increase in number of game media with restrictions in the second section SC2 is the second reference acquisition. This is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed due to the fact that the number is greater than or equal to the number.

If "1" is set to the third transition confirmation flag (step S2205: YES), the second start setting process is executed (step S2206). In the second start setting process, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 is set to a value corresponding to 50 games as the number of initial continuation games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. set. As already explained, when the first start setting process (steps S2203 and S2213) is executed, 40 games are set as the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. When step S2206) is executed, 50 games are set as the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. As a result, the number of initial continuation games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 executed when the third shift confirmation flag is set to "1" is changed to the initial number of games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 executed when another start trigger occurs. It is possible to make the number of games larger than the number of continuous games. However, it is not limited to this, and the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 set by the first start setting process and the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 set by the second start setting process are different. The configuration may be the same, and the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 set by the first start setting process is larger than the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 set by the second start setting process. It is good also as a structure which is the number of games.

After that, the second start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2207). The second start command is a command indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has newly started under the condition that the ending flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". Further, the second start command includes information indicating that the current initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 50 games. In the situation where the ending flag is set to "1", as already explained, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is in a state where the remaining number of continuous games is not added. Therefore, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started under the condition that the ending flag is set to "1", the remaining number of continuous games is not added in the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

When the second start command is received, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, the image display device 63 displays a moving image corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and also displays the number of game media acquired in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. However, unlike the case where the first start command is received, the display indicating the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not performed. In a situation where the ending flag is set to "1", the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the number of additional games before the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 becomes "0". Alternatively, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may end with the end of the second section SC2 when the limited total net increase number of game media in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase number. In this case, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied by not displaying the number of remaining games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as described above. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity.

FIG. 42(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the second start command is received. As shown in FIG. 42(b), the image display device 63 displays a second effect image corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in which the ending flag is set to "1". G41 and a winning number image G33 showing the number of game media the player has won in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are displayed. In the second effect image G41, a moving image display is performed in which a specific character image is displayed in front of a specific background image, and the display modes of the specific background image and the specific character image change. In the winning number image G33, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started, "0 cards won" is displayed. increases, the increased number of game media is added to the number displayed in the acquired number image G33.

Returning to the description of the normal process (FIG. 41), if the third transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2205: NO), the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. It is determined whether or not (step S2208). If the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2208: YES), the processing after step S2209 is not executed. In the processing after step S2209, the number of games required for transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is subtracted as one game is completed, and the condition for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is established as the game is completed. If so, a process for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed. In this case, if the state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, by not executing the processing after step S2209, even if the game is completed in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, it is simulated. It is possible to avoid causing the transition to the bonus state ST4 to become closer.

When the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S2208: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3". Then, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for this game is "3" (step S2209). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S2209: NO), the processing after step S2210 is not executed. As already explained, in the processing after step S2210, the number of games required for transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is subtracted as one game is completed, and the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is performed as the game is completed. When the condition is satisfied, the process for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed. In this case, if the game with the bet number of "2" is executed, the process from step S2210 onwards is not executed, so that even if the game with the bet number of "2" is completed, it will be false. It is possible to avoid causing the shift to the bonus state ST4 to become closer.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S2209: YES), it is determined whether or not the second transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2210). As already explained, the second transition determination flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition lottery process (step S2112) has won the transition lottery.

When "1" is set to the second transition confirmation flag (step S2210: YES), the value of the transition waiting counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2211). As already explained, the transition standby counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transition standby games (specifically, 5 games) has been completed since the second transition determination flag was set to "1". is. If the value of the transition standby counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2212: YES), the first start setting process is executed (step S2213). The contents of the first start setting process are the same as those in step S2203 of the normal process (FIG. 41). As a result, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is set to a value corresponding to 40 games, which is the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. be.

After that, it is determined whether or not the ending flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2214). If the ending flag is not set to "1" (step S2214: NO), the first start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2215), and if the ending flag is set to "1" (step S2214: YES), the second start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2216). The first start command transmitted in step S2215 and the second start command transmitted in step S2216 contain information indicating that the current initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 40 games. there is

When the first start command is received, the effect-side MPU 92 sets the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the first effect image G31, the number-of-games image G32, and the number-of-wins image G33 as shown in FIG. 42(a). On the other hand, when the second start command is received, the effect-side MPU 92 changes the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to the upper lamp 61 in the same manner as when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the second start command transmitted in step S2207. , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 . In this case, the image display device 63 displays the second effect image G41 and the acquisition number image G33 such that the display shown in FIG. 42(b) is performed.

If the second transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2210: NO), 1 is subtracted from the value of the canceled game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S2217). The number-of-released-games counter 74e is the number of games required to transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in a situation where none of the first to third transition confirmation flags of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". This is a counter for specifying the number of unlocked games in the main MPU 72 . When the game section shifts from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 and the direct hit lottery process (step S1806) does not result in a direct hit, the number of unlocked games is set to the counter 74e for the number of unlocked games, Also when the second section SC2 is maintained after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the number of unlocked games is set to the number-of-unlocked games counter 74e.

If the value of the unlocked game number counter 74e after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2218: YES), the first start setting process is executed (step S2213). The contents of the first start setting process are the same as those in step S2203 of the normal process (FIG. 41). As a result, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is set to a value corresponding to 40 games, which is the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. be.

After that, it is determined whether or not the ending flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2214). If the ending flag is not set to "1" (step S2214: NO), the first start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2215), and if the ending flag is set to "1" (step S2214: YES), the second start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2216). When the first start command is received, the effect-side MPU 92 sets the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the first effect image G31, the number-of-games image G32, and the number-of-wins image G33 as shown in FIG. 42(a). On the other hand, when the second start command is received, the effect-side MPU 92 changes the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to the upper lamp 61 in the same manner as when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the second start command transmitted in step S2207. , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 . In this case, the image display device 63 displays the second effect image G41 and the acquisition number image G33 such that the display shown in FIG. 42(b) is performed.

When the process of step S2207 is executed, when the process of step S2215 is executed, or when the process of step S2216 is executed, it is determined whether or not the lighting standby flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" ( step S2219). As already described, the lighting standby flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that switching of the section display portion 67 from the off state to the lighting state is waiting in the second section SC2. If the lighting standby flag is set to "1" (step S2219: YES), the lighting processing of the section display section 67 is executed (step S2220). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that the current section is the second section SC2. Note that the lighting standby flag is cleared to "0" when the process of step S2220 is executed.

When the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs while the lighting standby flag is set to "1" as described above, the interval display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. The pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a game in which the net increase expected value of game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media betted in one game" from the "expected number of game media given in one game") can be 1 or more. state. In other words, although the section display section 67 can be maintained in the off state even after transitioning to the second section SC2, it is surely turned on when the game state shifts to a game state in which the expected value of the net increase in game media can be 1 or more. . As a result, in a game state in which the net increase expected value of game media can be 1 or more, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the game state is in question.

Next, how the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 43(a) shows a period in which the game section is the second section SC2, FIG. 43(b) shows a period in which one game is being executed, and FIG. " is set and the value of the transition standby counter is 1 or more, and the situation is that none of the first to third transition confirmation flags is set to "1" and the canceled game number counter FIG. 43(d) shows the period of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and FIG. 43(e) shows the ending of the main side RAM 74. FIG. 43(f) shows a period during which the flag is set to "1", and FIG. 43(f) shows a state of an add-on possible period in which the remaining number of continuous games can be added in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and FIG. 43(g). is either the period during which the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the second reference number of games, or the period during which the total net increase in number of game media with restrictions in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the second reference acquisition number Indicates a situation that is a pre-termination period.

In the situation where the game section is the first section SC1, a new game is started at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 43(b). In this case, by winning one of the winning combinations in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the game section changes from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 43(a). Also, in the direct hit lottery process (step S1806) executed at the time of transition to the second section SC2 this time, a direct hit has been won. Therefore, at the timing t2, which is the timing at which the current game ends, the game state shifts from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 43(d). 43(e), the ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1". As shown in 43(f), it becomes a period that can be added. In other words, when the addition condition described later is satisfied in the current pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is added.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(b), the game is repeated in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 including the timing of t3. Then, the game is executed from timing t4 to timing t5, so that the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 becomes "0". Therefore, at the timing of t5, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends as shown in FIG. 43(d). However, even if the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and the game returns to the normal game state ST1, the second section SC2 continues as shown in FIG. 43(a).

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(b), the game is repeated in the state of the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2 including the timing of t6. Then, in the game started at the timing of t7, the transition lottery process (step S2112) is won, or the number of remaining unlocked games counted by the unlocked game number counter 74e reaches 5 games. , a shift standby period as shown in FIG. 43(c).

The game is played repeatedly during the transition standby period, and the fifth game is executed during the transition standby period in the game executed at timings t8 to t9. As a result, at the timing t9, the transition waiting period ends as shown in FIG. 43(c), and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 starts as shown in FIG. 43(d). Further, since the ending flag of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" as shown in FIG. 43(e), it becomes an addable period as shown in FIG. 43(f).

After that, the game is repeatedly played in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the game is executed at timings t10 to t11. becomes equal to or greater than the first reference number of games, or the value obtained by multiplying the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter by the expected acquisition value of game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is added to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d. The result is equal to or greater than the first reference acquisition number. Therefore, at the timing of t11, the ending flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 43(e). When the ending flag is set to "1", the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not added. That is, at the timing of t11, the add-on period ends as shown in FIG. 43(f).

After that, the game is played repeatedly in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 with the ending flag set to "1", and the game is played at timings t12 to t13, whereby the rest of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed. , the number of continuous games becomes "0". Therefore, at the timing of t13, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends as shown in FIG. 43(d). In addition, since the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends when the ending flag is set to "1", the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 43(a). do. In this case, the state is the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

Next, a case in which transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs due to the pre-end period will be described.

When the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs in the second section SC2 and the second section SC2 is maintained at the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the game is played repeatedly, and the game is played at the timing of t14 to the timing of t15. By being executed, the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the first reference number of games. Therefore, at the timing of t15, the ending flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 43(e).

After that, in a situation where the game is repeatedly executed and the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference number of games, a new game is started at the timing t16 as shown in FIG. 43(b). In this case, at the timing t16, as shown in FIG. 43(g), the pre-end period starts, and at the timing t17 when the game ends, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 starts as shown in FIG. 43(d). Since the ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is already set to "1" as shown in FIG. does not become

After that, the game is played repeatedly in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and as shown in FIG. becomes "0". Therefore, at the timing of t19, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends as shown in FIG. 43(d). In addition, since the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends when the ending flag is set to "1", the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 43(a). do. In this case, the state is the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

In the period before the end, before the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 becomes "0", the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, or the game media in the second section SC2 is restricted. The ending condition of the second section SC2 may be satisfied when the total net increase number with the mark reaches the upper limit net increase number, and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may be forcibly ended accordingly. In this case, as already explained, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started in the pre-end period, the second start command is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92, whereby the image display device 63 continues the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Game count is not displayed. As a result, even if the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is forcibly terminated due to the fulfillment of the ending condition of the second section SC2, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Next, a description will be given of an effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs during the transition standby period of the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

As already explained, the transition standby period is any of the period in which the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1" and the value of the transition standby counter is 1 or more, or the first to third transition confirmation flags. is not set to "1" and the value of the number-of-released-games counter 74e is 5 or less. When five games are completed during the transition standby period, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs. During the transition standby period, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is obtained by utilizing the result of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R after rotation. A presentation may be executed that allows the player to recognize that a transition to .

FIGS. 44(a) and 44(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of the effect that allows the player to recognize that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will occur.

As already explained, the index value IV=10 that can be won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in a gaming state that is not in the CB state (the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3) has the first bell winning data and special Bell winning data is set. When winning with index value IV=10, when the left reel 32L is first stopped, regardless of the subsequent stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. The 1st bell prize is established. On the other hand, when winning with the index value IV=10, if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the first bell win or A special bell prize is established. In this case, establishment of the special bell prize is given priority, and the first bell prize is surely established when the special bell prize cannot be established in relation to the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44.

In the configuration in which the first bell winning data and the special bell winning data are set for the index value IV=10 as described above, the state is the normal game state ST1 and not the transition waiting period, and the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Under the circumstances, when the index value IV=10 is won, a display indicating that the left reel 32L is to be stopped for the first time is displayed as shown in FIG. 44(a). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(a1), the image display device 63 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary. As shown in (a2), a display corresponding to the stop order is performed in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are arbitrary. Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the order according to the information, the first bell winning is established reliably on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 44(a3).

On the other hand, when the index value IV=10 is won in the state of the normal game state ST1 and the transition standby period, a display indicating that the right reel 32R is first stopped is displayed as shown in FIG. 44(b). will be Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(b1), the image display device 63 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary, and the left reel 32L displays "White 7". " symbol, "White 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R. In addition, as shown in FIG. 44(b2), the dual-use display unit 66 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary. Then, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the order according to the notification, and each stop is made so that the "white 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML are stopped. By performing the stop operation of the buttons 42 to 44, a special bell prize is established on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 44(b3).

Even if the middle reel 32M is stopped as the first stop, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated so that the "white 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML are stopped. By performing the stop operation, a special bell prize is established on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 44(b3). Also, even if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, each stop is made at the stop operation timing when the "white 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol on the inline ML are stopped. If the buttons 42 to 44 are not operated to stop, the winning of the first bell is established.

Due to the above configuration, when the index value IV=10 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the role during the 5 games which are the normal game state ST1 and the transition standby period, the special bell prize is established. The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the winning of a special bell is notified, and the combination of symbols that enables establishment of a special bell prize is notified. Then, by stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the order according to the notification and performing the stop operation of each stop button 42 to 44 at the stop operation timing according to the notification, a special bell prize is awarded on the main line ML. To establish. This makes it possible for the player to recognize the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

The number of game media to be awarded is “15” regardless of whether the first bell win is established or the special bell win is established. Therefore, when the index value IV=10 is won, even if the execution mode of notifying the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is different depending on whether it is the transition waiting period or not, the player's advantage is affected. It is possible to prevent Also, since notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R does not directly benefit the player, it is necessary to check whether the interval display section 67 is lit when the stop order is notified as described above. No is optional.

A specific processing configuration for executing the notification as described above will be described below. FIG. 45(a) is a flow chart showing the stop order notification control process executed by the main MPU 72. FIG. The stop order notification control process is performed in step S712, which is a process that is executed after completion of the win/loss determination in the win lottery process (FIG. 16) and after the first control process (step S711) of the game section. executed.

If the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S2301: YES), notification control processing for the pseudo-bonus state is executed (step S2302). In the notification control process for the pseudo-bonus state, if any of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16), the number of bets for this game is "3". On the condition that the first bell winning is established, a display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is performed on the combined display unit 66, and the first bell winning is established. A command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be enabled is notified by the image display device 63. When the number of bets in the current game is "2", even if one of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the role in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the image display device 63 and dual-use display unit 66, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not reported, but the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported in the same manner as when the number of bets is "3". may be configured.

In the notification control process for the pseudo-bonus state, if any of the index values IV=7 to 9 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16), the number of bets for this game is "3". On the condition that the second bell winning is established, the display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which enables the establishment of the second bell winning, is displayed on the combined display unit 66. A command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be enabled is notified by the image display device 63. When the number of bets in the current game is "2", even if one of the index values IV=7 to 9 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the combination in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the image display device 63 and dual-use display unit 66, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not reported, but the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported in the same manner as when the number of bets is "3". may be configured.

In the notification control process for the pseudo-bonus state, if the index value IV=10 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), regardless of the number of bets in this game, the first bell win is established. Display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables is sent to the effecting side MPU 92 so that is notified by the image display device 63 .

If a negative determination is made in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the index value IV=10 has been won in the current game (step S2303). It should be noted that in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the index value IV=10 will not result in winning, so the case where the negative determination is made in step S2301 and the case where the affirmative determination is made in step S2303 is normal. It becomes game state ST1.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the notified flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2304). The notified flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the special bell winning has already been established during the transition waiting period. If the notified flag is not set to "1" (step S2304: NO), whether or not the value of the shift standby counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, or the value of the number-of-released-games counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is 5 or less (steps S2305 and S2306), it is determined whether or not it is the transition waiting period.

If it is the transition waiting period (step S2305 or step S2306: YES), the display data setting process for the right first stop is executed (step S2307). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary is started on the combined display section 66. FIG. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated. After that, the right first stop command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2308). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the right first stop command, it causes the image display device 63 to start the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

If the notified flag is set to "1" (step S2304: YES), or if the transition waiting period is not in effect (steps S2305 and S2306: NO), display data setting processing for left first stop is executed. (step S2309). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary is started on the combined display section 66. FIG. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated. After that, the left first stop command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2310). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the left first stop command, it causes the image display device 63 to start the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

FIG. 45(b) is a flow chart showing the winning determination process executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG. Winning determination processing is executed in step S812, which is processing executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop rotating in the reel control processing (FIG. 20).

If a special bell win has been established in the current game (step S2401: YES), it is determined whether the value of the transition standby counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, or By determining whether or not the value is 5 or less (steps S2402 and S2403), it is determined whether or not it is the transition waiting period. If it is the transition standby period (step S2402 or step S2403: YES), after setting the notified flag of the main side RAM 74 to "1" (step S2404), the notified command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2405). . The notified command is a command for making the effect-side MPU 92 recognize that the special bell winning has been established during the transition waiting period. When receiving the notified command, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2401, if a negative determination is made in step S2403, or if the processing of step S2405 is executed, other processing is executed (step S2406). In other processes, the types of symbols stopped on the main line ML on the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are grasped. Then, based on the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is determined to be a winning combination in the lottery process (FIG. 16). It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, and if the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, the winning combination is considered to be established and the processing for handling the winning combination is executed. In the winning handling process, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that game media can be awarded in the medium awarding process if the winning is a minor win. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (step S302) so that the replay setting process is executed.

FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing a normal effect control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. The normal effect control process is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

If the left first stop command has been received (step S2501: YES), the processing for setting the left first stop effect is executed (step S2502). In the left first stop effect setting process, a process for causing the image display device 63 to start displaying corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary is executed.

If the right first stop command has been received (step S2503: YES), the right first stop effect setting process is executed (step S2504). In the right first stop effect setting process, a process for causing the image display device 63 to start displaying corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary is executed.

If the notified command has been received (step S2505: YES), the process of setting the final effect at the time of winning is executed (step S2506). In the processing for setting the confirmation effect at the time of winning, the processing for executing the effect indicating that the shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. Execute. After that, "1" is set to the fixed effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2507). The fixed effect flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has been confirmed has been executed.

If the first start command or the second start command is received (step S2508: YES), it is determined whether or not the fixed effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2509). The first start command and the second start command are transmitted from the main side MPU 72 when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started as already explained. That is, in step S2509, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started after the effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed.

When the fixed effect flag is not set to "1" (step S2509: NO), the process of setting the fixed effect at the time of non-winning is executed (step S2510). In the processing for setting the fixed performance at the time of non-winning, the processing for executing the performance indicating the start of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 is executed. Here, when the setting processing of the fixed effect at the time of winning is executed, the effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed is executed, whereas the fixed effect at the time of non-winning is executed. When the setting process is executed, an effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started is executed. The contents of these productions are different. Any method can be used to make the content of the effect different. For example, a method of making the content of the moving image displayed on the image display device 63 different or a method of making the content of the character image displayed on the image display device 63 different can be mentioned. be done.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2509, or if the process of step S2510 is executed, if the first start command is received (step S2511: YES), the first setting process of the bonus start effect is executed. (Step S2512). On the other hand, if the second start command has been received (step S2511: NO), the second setting process for the bonus start effect is executed (step S2513).

In the first setting process of the bonus start effect (step S2512), the continuous game number counter for grasping and the continuous game number counter for display provided in the effect side RAM 94 are respectively included in the first start command received this time. The information of the number of initial continuous games (specifically, information of 40 games) is set. The number-of-continued-games counter for grasping is a counter for specifying the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 measured by the main MPU 72 by the effect-side MPU 92, and the number-of-continued-games counter for display is an image. This is a counter for specifying the number of remaining continuous games displayed in the number-of-games image G32 on the display device 63 by the effect-side MPU 92 . Also, in the first bonus start effect setting process (step S2512), the first pseudo-bonus data table is read from the effect-side ROM 93 to the effect-side RAM 94 . By controlling the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 according to the first pseudo-bonus data table, the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the situation where the ending flag is not set to "1" is the upper part. It is executed by the lamp 61 , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 . In this case, the image display device 63 displays the first effect image G31, the number-of-games image G32, and the number-of-wins image G33 as shown in FIG. 42(a). In the first pseudo-bonus data table, data are set that enable execution of effects corresponding to a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games). If it continues, the data in the first order in the first pseudo-bonus data table will be referred to again. Also, in the first setting process (step S2512) of the bonus start effect, the effect side ending flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0". The effect-side ending flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the ending flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1".

In the second setting process (step S2513) of the bonus start effect, the initial value contained in the second start command received this time is set in each of the continuous game number counter for grasping and the continuous game number counter for display of the effect side RAM 94. Information on the number of continuous games (specifically, 40 games or 50 games) is set. In addition, in the bonus start effect second setting process (step S2513), the second pseudo-bonus data table is read from the effect-side ROM 93 to the effect-side RAM 94 . By controlling the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the second pseudo-bonus data table, the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the situation where the ending flag is set to "1" is the upper part. It is executed by the lamp 61 , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 . In this case, the image display device 63 displays the second effect image G41 and the acquired number image G33 as shown in FIG. 42(b). In the second pseudo-bonus data table, data are set that enable execution of effects corresponding to a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games). If it continues, the first data in the second pseudo-bonus data table will be referred to again. Also, in the second setting process (step S2513) of the bonus start effect, the effect side ending flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1". As already explained, the effect-side ending flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the ending flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1".

It should be noted that after the setting process of the fixed effect at the time of non-winning (step S2510) is executed, the first setting process of the bonus start effect (step S2512) or the second setting process of the bonus start effect (step S2513) is executed. In this case, after an effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started.

In the normal effect control process, other processes are executed in addition to the various processes described above (step S2514). In other processes, processes for executing effects different from the above effects are executed in the normal game state ST1.

Next, how various effects are executed during the transition standby period will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 47(a) shows the transition waiting period, FIG. 47(b) shows the period during which one game is being executed, FIG. 47(c) shows the period of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, FIG. 47(d) shows the timing of winning with the index value IV=10, and FIG. 47(e) shows the period during which the first left stop notification indicating the first stop of the left reel 32L is being executed. , FIG. 47(f) shows the period during which the right first stop notification indicating the first stop of the right reel 32R is being executed, and FIG. 47(g) shows the timing when the special bell win is established. (h) shows the period during which the fixed effect is executed at the time of non-winning, and FIG. 47(i) shows the period during which the fixed effect is executed at the time of winning.

First, the case where the special bell winning is established during the transition waiting period will be described.

A new game is started as shown in FIG. 47(b) at timing t1, which is not the transition waiting period, and the player wins the index value IV=10 in the game as shown in FIG. 47(d). In this case, since it is not the transition standby period, as shown in FIG. 47(e), the first left stop notification indicating that the left reel 32L is to be stopped for the first time is executed. The player who confirms the left first stop notification performs the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R so as to first stop the left reel 32L. Therefore, the winning of the first bell is established.

After that, at the timing of t2, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 47(b). In the transition lottery process (step S2112) in the relevant game, when the transition lottery process (step S2112) is won or the number of remaining unlocked games becomes 5 games or less, the transition waiting period starts as shown in FIG. 47(a).

After that, a new game is started at the timing t3 as shown in FIG. 47(b), and in this game the index value IV=10 is won as shown in FIG. 47(d). In this case, since it is the transition standby period, as shown in FIG. 47(f), the first right stop notification indicating that the right reel 32R is to be stopped for the first time is executed. The player who confirms the right first stop notification performs the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so as to make the right reel 32R the first stop. A stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is performed. However, since the stop operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 is not accurate, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so that the right reel 32R is stopped first, but the special bell wins. Instead, the first bell prize is established.

After that, a new game is started at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 47(b), and in this game the index value IV=10 is won as shown in FIG. 47(d). In this case, since it is the transition standby period, as shown in FIG. 47(f), the first right stop notification indicating that the right reel 32R is to be stopped for the first time is executed. The player who confirms the right first stop notification performs the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so as to make the right reel 32R the first stop. A stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is performed. This time, the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is accurate, so that a special bell prize is established at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 47(g). Further, when the special bell win is established, an effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed is started at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 47(i).

After that, a new game is started at the timing t6 as shown in FIG. 47(b), and in this game the index value IV=10 is won as shown in FIG. 47(d). In this case, although it is a transition standby period, since the special bell winning has already been established during the transition standby period, as shown in FIG. is executed. The player who confirms the left first stop notification performs the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R so as to first stop the left reel 32L. Therefore, the winning of the first bell is established.

After that, a new game is started at timing t7 to timing t8 as shown in FIG. 47(b). In this case, the game is the final game of the transition waiting period. Therefore, at the timing t8 when the game ends, the transition standby period ends as shown in FIG. 47(a) and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 starts as shown in FIG. 47(c). In this case, at the timing t8 when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 starts, as shown in FIG. 47(i), the fixed effect at the time of winning is terminated and the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started.

As described above, by providing an opportunity for establishing a special bell prize during the transition standby period, the fact that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed is confirmed by utilizing the stop result after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped. It is possible to notify Further, after the special bell winning is established, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is performed even during the transition waiting period by executing an effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that it will occur.

Next, a case where the special bell prize is not established during the transition standby period will be described.

In the transition waiting period as shown in FIG. 47(a), a new game is executed at timings t9, t10 and t11 as shown in FIG. 47(b). In this case, the game started at the timing of t11 is the final game of the transition waiting period. Therefore, at the timing of t12 when the game ends, the transition standby period ends as shown in FIG. 47(a) and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 starts as shown in FIG. 47(c). In this case, since the special bell winning has not been established during the transition waiting period, the fixed effect at the time of winning is not executed as shown in FIG. 47(i). Therefore, from the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. That is, an effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started is executed. After that, an effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed.

As described above, when the special bell winning is not established in the transition standby period, and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started, an effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started is executed. , it is possible for the player to clearly recognize that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started even if the index value IV=10 is not won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) during the transition waiting period.

<Regarding Pseudo-Bonus State ST4>
Next, the details of processing in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus process executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game. As already explained, the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed after the win/loss determination is completed in the lottery process (FIG. 16) and before the first control process (step S711) of the game section. It is executed in step S710, which is a process. Then, the pseudo-bonus processing at the start of the game is executed at step S2103 in the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game (FIG. 40). In the case of the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the pseudo-bonus processing at the start of the game is not executed.

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" (step S2601). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S2601: NO), the processing after step S2602 is not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the processing for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 after step S2602 is not executed. .

If the number of bets for this game is "3" (step S2601: YES), it is determined whether or not the ending flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2602). As already explained, the ending flag indicates that there is a high possibility that the number of times the game has been executed in the second section SC2, which is counted using the continuous game number counter 74c, reaches the upper limit number of games, or that the total winning number counter 74d is set. This is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify that there is a high possibility that the total net increase number with a limit of the game media being used and counted will reach the upper limit net increase number. Specifically, when the sum of the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c of the main-side RAM 74 and the value of the pseudo-bonus-continuation counter of the main-side RAM 74 is greater than or equal to the first reference number of games (specifically, 1400 games). Alternatively, the value obtained by multiplying the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 by the expected acquisition value of the game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and adding the result to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 is the first reference. When the obtained number (more specifically, 2100) or more, the ending flag is set to "1". If the ending flag is set to "1" (step S2602: YES), the processing after step S2603 is not executed. As a result, in a situation where the number of games executed in the second section SC2 is highly likely to reach the upper limit number of games, or in a situation where the total number of net increases with restrictions on game media is highly likely to reach the upper limit number of net increases, Processing for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 after step S2603 is not executed.

If the ending flag is not set to "1" (step S2602: NO), the current status is a pseudo-bonus state by determining whether the value of the additional period counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. It is determined whether or not it is the additional period in ST4 (step S2603). The add-on period counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not it is an add-on period and the number of remaining games to be played during the add-on period.

If the value of the add-on period counter is "0" and it is not the add-on period (step S2603: NO), one of the index values IV=11 to 15 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game. (step S2604: YES), the transition lottery process for the additional period is executed (step S2605). In the addition period transition lottery process, the table for the addition period transition lottery provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It is determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the add-on period in which the add-on is more likely to occur. In the lottery process (Fig. 16) for the winning combination in this game, if the player wins with the index value IV=11, there is a 10% chance that the player wins during the additional period, and the player wins with the index value IV=12. In this case, there is a 5% probability that the player will be selected for the transition to the additional period, and if the index value IV=13 is won, there is a 20% chance that the player will be selected for the transition to the additional period and the index value IV=14 will be selected. In this case, there is a probability of 15% that the player will be selected for the transition to the additional period. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of winning during the additional period. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

In the event that the transition to the additional period is won (step S2606: YES), the process of adding the number of continued games is executed (step S2607). In the process of adding the number of continuous games, the number of games equal to or greater than the number of continuous games for which the extra period will continue is added to the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 . Specifically, the addition period continues over 10 games, and in step S2607, 20 games, which is the number of games equal to or greater than 10 games, is added to the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74. FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 from becoming "0" in the middle of the addition period. After that, the first addition command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2608). The first addition command is a command for making the production-side MPU 92 recognize that the number of games has been added when the transition is made to the addition period. In addition, the first addition command includes information on 20 games, which is the number of games to be added this time. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the first addition command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute an effect indicating that the number of games has been increased at the time of transition to the additional period. do. After that, the addition winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2609). The add-on win flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the move win for the add-on period has been won in the move-on lottery process for the add-on period (step S2605).

In the case where the addition period transition lottery process (step S2605) does not win the addition period transition lottery (step S2606: NO), the first addition lottery process is executed (step S2610). In the first add-on lottery process, the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is increased by using the first add-on lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74. It is determined by lottery whether or not to generate the extra charge that will be made. When index value IV=11 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 10%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 10%, 50 games are selected with a probability of 10%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 70%. Out of probability. When index value IV=12 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 5%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 5%, 50 games are selected with a probability of 5%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 85%. Out of probability. When index value IV=13 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 20%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 20%, 50 games are selected with a probability of 20%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 40%. Out of probability. When the index value IV=14 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 15%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 15%, 50 games are selected with a probability of 15%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 55%. Out of probability. When index value IV=15 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 10%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 10%, 50 games are selected with a probability of 10%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 10%. Out of probability. In this case, the index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of winning on top. Also, in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the lower the probability of winning the index value IV, the higher the expected value of the number of games to be added. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

If any of the 10 games, 20 games, and 50 games is selected in the first addition lottery process (step S2610) and the addition win is won (step S2611: YES), the process of adding the number of continuous games is executed (step S2612). In the process of adding the number of continued games, the number of games selected in the first addition lottery process (step S2610) is added to the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main side RAM74. After that, the second addition command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2613). The second addition command is for causing the effect side MPU 92 to recognize that the addition winning was made in the first addition lottery processing (step S2610) and the number of addition games selected in the first addition lottery processing (step S2610). The second addition command includes information corresponding to the number of additional games selected in the first addition lottery process (step S2610). When receiving the second addition command, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect indicating that the number of games has been increased.

If the value of the add-on period counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, indicating that the add-on period is on (step S2603: YES), the second add-on lottery process is executed (step S2614). In the second add-on lottery process, the first add-on lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to add to the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The number of games to be played will be determined by lottery. That is, in the first addition lottery process (step S2610), the number of games may not be added, but in the second addition lottery process (step S2614), the number of games is certainly added. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the additional period. In addition, the second addition lottery process (step S2614) is executed in each game for which the remaining number of continuous games in the addition period is consumed during the addition period. As a result, in the additional period, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is added to each game for which the remaining number of continuous games during the additional period is consumed.

In the second addition lottery process (step S2614), if an index value IV other than the index value IV = 11 to 15 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 80%, and 20 games are selected with a probability of 10%. 50 games are selected with a probability of 10%. When the index value IV=11 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 50%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 25%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 25%. When the index value IV=12 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 60%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 20%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 20%. When the index value IV=13 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 20%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 40%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 40%. When the index value IV=14 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 30%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 35%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 35%. When the index value IV=15 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 50%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 25%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 25%. In this case, the lower the probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the higher the expected value of the number of games added to the index value IV. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). The expected value of the number of games added when the second addition lottery process (step S2614) is executed once is the number of games added when the first addition lottery process (step S2610) is executed once. The number of games is more than the expected value of the number. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the additional period.

After that, the number of continued games is added (step S2615). In the process of adding the number of continued games, the number of games selected in the second addition lottery process (step S2614) is added to the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main side RAM74. After that, the third addition command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2616). The third addition command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize the number of additional games selected in the second addition lottery process (step S2614). ) contains information corresponding to the number of additional games selected in . When receiving the third addition command, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect indicating that the number of games has been increased.

Next, the pseudo-bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The pseudo-bonus processing is executed at step S905 in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 21). As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, so the pseudo-bonus processing also stops all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from rotating in one game. is executed after

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" (step S2701). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S2701: NO), the processes after step S2702 are not executed. As a result, even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not subtracted, and the addition period in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. remaining number of continuous games is not subtracted.

In the case of the CB state (the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3), the pseudo-bonus processing (FIG. 49) itself is not executed. The number of games played in the state is not treated as the number of games played in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, even if the transition to the CB state occurs in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is restarted from the state of the remaining number of continuous games immediately before the transition to the CB state after the CB state ends. .

If the number of bets for the current number of games is "3" (step S2701: YES), the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2702). After that, it is determined whether or not the current condition is the add-on period by determining whether the value of the add-on period counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2703).

If the value of the add-on period counter is "0" and it is not the add-on period (step S2703: NO), it is determined whether or not the add-on win flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2704). At the start of the game this time, if the transition lottery process for the addition period (step S2605) wins the transition to the addition period, the addition winning flag is set to "1".

When "1" is set to the add-on win flag (step S2704: YES), the add-on period setting process is executed (step S2705). In the additional period setting process, the additional period counter of the main RAM 74 is set to a value corresponding to 10 games, which is the initial number of continuous games during the additional period. After that, after clearing the addition winning flag to "0" (step S2706), a command to start the addition period is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2707). The add-on period start command is a command for making the effect-side MPU 92 recognize that the add-on period has started. When the production side MPU 92 receives the start command of the additional period, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the production indicating that the additional period has started and the additional period. make it

If the value of the additional period counter is 1 or more and it is the additional period (step S2703: YES), the value of the additional period counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2708). Then, when the value of the add-on period counter after the subtraction becomes "0", the add-on period ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S2704, when the process of step S2707 is executed, or when the process of step S2708 is executed, it is checked whether the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 is "0". Determine (step S2709). If the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S2709: YES), it is determined whether or not the ending flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2710).

If the ending flag is not set to "1" (step S2710: NO), the pseudo bonus status flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2711). Thereafter, lottery processing for the number of unlocked games is executed (step S2712). The number of unlocked games is, as already explained, the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs in the transition lottery process (step S2112) when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not won. This is a counter for identification by the MPU 72 . In the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, first, the lottery table for the number of unlocked games pre-stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 . Then, the number of unlocked games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter against the lottery table of the number of unlocked games. In this case, one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of unlocked games. In addition, the selection probabilities for each number of unlocked games are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the probability of selecting the number of unlocked games with a large number of games is set high, or the probability of selecting the number of unlocked games with a small number of games is set high. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which After executing the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, the number of unlocked games selected in the lottery process for the number of unlocked games is set in the unlocked game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S2713). The unlocked game number counter 74e is a counter for specifying the number of remaining unlocked games in the main MPU 72 .

Thereafter, a command to end the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S2714). The end command of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a command for making the effect-side MPU 92 recognize that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the end command of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the upper lamp 61, the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is started after the effect indicating the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed. It controls the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 .

If the ending flag is set to "1" (step S2710: YES), the processing for setting the end preparation state ST5 is executed (step S2715). In the setting process, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, in the setting process, the termination preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the end preparation state ST5 is set, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST5. Thereafter, the termination preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2716). As already described, the end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST5.

As already explained in the end preparation state ST5, if the affirmative determination is made in step S1902 in the second control process (FIG. 38) of the game section and the end preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S1903: NO), after setting the end preparation completion flag to "1", the process for specifying whether or not the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is executed, and the second control process of the game section in the current game ( FIG. 38) ends. On the other hand, if the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S1903: YES), processing for ending the second section SC2 and shifting to the first section SC1 is executed (steps S1914 to S1916). ). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended ends.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the pseudo-bonus effect control process executed by the effect-side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. The effect control process for the pseudo bonus is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

First, addition processing is executed (step S2801). FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing addition processing. In addition processing, it is determined in step S2901 whether or not the first addition command has been received. As already explained, the first addition command is issued when the number of games (specifically, 20 games) at the time of transition is added to the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when the transition to the additional period occurs. This command is sent from the main MPU 72 .

If the first addition command has been received (step S2901: YES), the information on the number of games to be added (specifically, 20 games) included in the first addition command is read, and the readout is performed. The obtained game number information is added to the continuous game number counter for grasping and the continuous game number counter for display in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2902). As already explained, the continuous game number counter for grasping is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 counted by the main side MPU 72 by the effect side MPU 92 . As described above, the continuous game number counter for display is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuous games to be displayed in the game number image G32 on the image display device 63 by the effect side MPU 92 . The number of games to be added this time is added to the number of games in the number-of-games image G32 displayed on the image display device 63 by being added to the value of the number-of-continued-games counter for display. When the number of games is increased, the number of games to be increased is notified to the player before the display of the number-of-games image G32 is updated so that the number of games is increased.

In the addition process, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not the second addition command has been received. As already explained, the second addition command is a command transmitted from the main side MPU 72 when an addition win is made in the first addition lottery process (step S2610).

If the second addition command has been received (step S2903: YES), stock lottery processing is executed (step S2904). In the stock lottery process, a stock lottery table provided in the performance-side ROM 93 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the performance-side RAM 94 are used to determine by lottery whether or not to notify the player of the addition that has occurred this time. decide. In this case, the player is notified of the addition that has occurred this time because the stock lottery is lost with a probability of 50%, and the addition that has occurred this time is not notified to the player because the stock is won with a probability of 50%.

If the stock lottery is lost in the stock lottery process (step S2905: NO), information on the number of games to be added (specifically, 10 games, 20 games, etc.) included in the second addition command received this time. game or 50 games), and the information on the read number of games is added to the continuous game number counter for grasping and the continuous game number counter for display in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2906). The number of games to be added this time is added to the number of games in the number-of-games image G32 displayed on the image display device 63 by being added to the value of the number-of-continued-games counter for display. When the number of games is increased, the number of games to be increased is notified to the player before the display of the number-of-games image G32 is updated so that the number of games is increased.

If the stock is won in the stock lottery process (step S2905: YES), the information on the number of games to be added included in the second addition command received this time (specifically, 10 games, 20 games) and 50 games), and adds the read game number information to the continuous game number counter for grasping in the effect side RAM 94, but does not add it to the continuous game number counter for display (step S2907). The number of games to be added this time is not added to the number of games in the number-of-games image G32 displayed on the image display device 63 because it is not added to the value of the number-of-continued-games counter for display.

In the addition process, it is determined in step S2908 whether or not the third addition command has been received. The third addition command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the second addition lottery process (step S2614) is executed by starting a game for which the number of continuing games remaining in the addition period is consumed during the addition period. command.

If the third addition command has been received (step S2908: YES), it is determined whether or not it is the production side addition period (step S2909). The additional period is a period that continues over 10 games as already explained. However, if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed during the addition period, the second addition lottery process (step S2614) is not executed, so that the addition of the number of games does not occur and the remaining games during the addition period are continued. numbers are not digested. Further, when the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) occurs during the additional period, even if the game is executed in the CB state, the number of games is not increased and the remaining number of continuous games during the additional period. is not digested.

On the other hand, during the additional period, the effect corresponding to the additional period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 under the control of the effect side MPU 92. FIG. In particular, the image display device 63 displays a moving image along a series of stories corresponding to the additional period, and in this moving image display, every time a new game is executed during the additional period, a moving image portion corresponding to the game is started. It is done as follows. The moving image display is set so that the moving image display along the series of stories ends when the 10th game after the start of the additional period ends.

In the above configuration, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state is executed in the middle of the addition period, the progress of the addition period is stopped in the main side MPU 72, while the effect side MPU 92 performs the addition. To advance the performance corresponding to the period. That is, after the effect corresponding to the additional period is started, even if the progress of the additional period is stopped by the main MPU 72, the effect corresponding to the additional period progresses with the new start of one game. It will happen. Therefore, even if a game that stops the progress of the additional period occurs in the main MPU 72 during the additional period, the performance corresponding to the additional period can be progressed without discomfort.

If a game that stops the progress of the additional period occurs in the main MPU 72 in the middle of the additional period, the game after the video display along the series of stories corresponding to the additional period is completed. , the actual add-on period controlled by the main MPU 72 ends. In this case, the effect-side additional period is a period during which the effect corresponding to the additional period is executed under the control of the effect-side MPU 92 . When the performance side MPU 92 receives the start command of the additional period from the main side MPU 72, the performance side additional period counter provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set with information corresponding to 10 games, which is the initial number of continuing games of the additional period. . Then, every time a new game is started, the value of the performance side addition period counter is subtracted by 1 regardless of whether the game is in a non-CB state and the number of bets is "3". A performance corresponding to the value of the side addition period counter is executed in each game, and the performance corresponding to the addition period is executed when the game in which the value of the performance side addition period counter becomes '0' ends. terminate.

When the third addition command is received (step S2908: YES), the value of the production side addition period counter is 1 or more, so that it is the production side addition period (step S2909: YES), the received this time Information on the number of games to be added (specifically, any of 10 games, 20 games, or 50 games) included in the 3 addition command is read, and the read information on the number of games is stored in the effect side RAM 94. It is added to each of the continuous game number counter for understanding and the continuous game number counter for display (step S2910). The number of games to be added this time is added to the number of games in the number-of-games image G32 displayed on the image display device 63 by being added to the value of the number-of-continued-games counter for display. When the number of games is increased, the player is notified of the number of games to be added before the display of the number-of-games image G32 is updated to increase the number of games.

After that, the progress processing of the additional effect is executed (step S2911). In the progress processing of the additional performance, 1 is subtracted from the value of the performance-side additional period counter. Also, the data range to be referred to in the data table for executing the additional effect read out to the effect side RAM 94 is updated in accordance with the start of the new game this time. For example, if it is the 1st game in the effect side additional period, the data range of the 1st game in the above data table will be the reference object, and if it is the 2nd game in the effect side additional period, the data range of the 2nd game in the above data table will be the reference target. is a reference target, and if it is the 10th game in the effect side additional period, the data range of the 10th game in the data table is the reference target.

If the third addition command is received (step S2908: YES), and the value of the production side addition period counter is "0", it is not the production side addition period (step S2909: NO), Information on the number of games to be added included in the third addition command (specifically, one of 10 games, 20 games, and 50 games) is read, and the read information on the number of games is stored in the effect side RAM 94. is added to the number-of-continued-games counter for grasping, but not added to the number-of-continued-games counter for display (step S2912). The number of games to be added this time is not added to the number of games in the number-of-games image G32 displayed on the image display device 63 because it is not added to the value of the number-of-continued-games counter for display.

Returning to the description of the effect control process for the pseudo bonus (FIG. 50), after executing the addition process in step S2801, the process for effect side addition period is executed (step S2802). FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the effect-side additional period processing.

First, by determining whether or not the value of the effect side addition period counter of the effect side RAM 94 is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not it is the effect side addition period (step S3001). If the value of the production side additional period counter is "0" and it is not the production side additional period (step S3001: NO), it is determined whether or not the start command of the additional period has been received (step S3002).

The add-on period start command is a command sent from the main MPU 72 when the add-on period starts as already explained. When the start command of the additional period is received (step S3002: YES), the effect setting process of the additional period is executed (step S3003). In the addition period effect setting process, the effect side addition period counter of the effect side RAM 94 is set with information corresponding to 10 games, which is the initial number of continuous games during the addition period. Further, in the effect setting process for the add-on period, the data table for executing the add-on effect is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94 . As already explained in the data table, the data range corresponding to each of the 1st game to the 10th game is set. For example, if it is the 1st game in the effect side additional period, the data range of the 1st game in the above data table will be the reference object, and if it is the 2nd game in the effect side additional period, the data range of the 2nd game in the above data table will be referred. is a reference target, and if it is the 10th game in the performance-side additional period, the data range of the 10th game in the data table is the reference target.

When the value of the effect side additional period counter is 1 or more and it is the effect side additional period (step S3001: YES), it is determined whether or not a game start command has been received (step S3004). As already described, the game start command is transmitted when the main side MPU 72 executes step S713 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). That is, the game start command is transmitted when one game is newly started.

If a game start command has been received (step S3004: YES), whether or not the number of bets in the game started this time is "2", or the state is CB (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) It is determined whether or not (step S3005). As already explained, when the game is started in a situation where the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "3", the main MPU 72 sets the first bet number When the command is transmitted and the game is started in a situation where the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "2", a second bet number command is transmitted in step S604 in the setting process at the time of opening (FIG. 15). . If the second bet number command has been received, an affirmative determination is made in step S3005. Further, since the game start command includes information corresponding to the current game state, if information indicating that the game start command is in the CB state is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S3005. .

As already explained, when a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in a CB state is executed during the extra period, the main MPU 72 stops progress of the extra period. On the other hand, even if a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in a CB state is executed in the middle of the additional period, the effect side MPU 92 does Proceed with the corresponding production. Therefore, during the production side addition period (step S3001: YES), if a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in a CB state is started (steps S3004 and S3005: YES), steps S3006 to S3008 A process for progressing the performance-side additional period is executed.

Specifically, first, the minimum number of games is selected as the number of games to be added (step S3006). As already explained, the main MPU 72 executes the second addition lottery process (step S2614) in each game during the addition period, and in the second addition lottery process (step S2614), one of 10 games, 20 games and 50 games is selected. selected. That is, in step S3006, 10 games, which is the minimum number of games, are selected from among these numbers of games. Then, the information corresponding to the selected 10 games is added to the value of the continuous game number counter for display in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3007). The number of games in the number-of-games image G32 on the image display device 63 is increased by adding the value of the number-of-continued-games counter for display. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the number of games in the additional period has been increased by executing the game this time, even in a situation where the progress of the additional period in the main MPU 72 is stopped. When the number of games is increased, the player is notified of the number of games to be added before the display of the number-of-games image G32 is updated so that the number of games is increased.

Here, if a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in a CB state is executed in the middle of the additional period, the progress of the additional period is stopped. In the case of the progressing configuration, the additional period will continue even after the production side additional period ends. In this case, the second addition lottery process (step S2614) is executed in the games in the continued addition period to generate additions of 10 games, 20 games, and 50 games. On the other hand, when a game with a bet number of "2" or a game with a CB state is executed in the middle of the addition period as described above, the value of the continuous game counter for display in the effect side RAM 94 Information corresponding to 10 games, which is the minimum number of games among the number of games to be added, is added. As a result, even if an effect indicating that the number of games has been added is executed when a game in which the bet number is "2" or a game in the CB state is executed in the middle of the additional period, It is possible to prevent notification that the number of games larger than the number of additional games given to the player is given to the player.

Further, when a game with a bet number of "2" or a game with a CB state is executed during the add-on period, the value of the continuous game number counter for display is incremented, while the number of continuous games for grasping is increased. Counter values are not incremented. Also, as already explained, when the second addition lottery process (step S2614) in the addition period is executed by the main MPU 72 in a situation other than the performance side addition period and the third addition command is transmitted, the third addition command is transmitted. is added to the value of the continuous game number counter for grasping (step S2912). Therefore, the number of games grasped as the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the effect side MPU 92 can be matched with the remaining number of continuous games managed by the main side MPU 72 .

After that, progress processing of the additional effect is executed (step S3008). The processing contents of the progress processing of the additional effect are the same as the progress processing of the additional effect of step S2911 in the processing for addition (FIG. 51). Specifically, in the progress processing of the additional effect, 1 is subtracted from the value of the effect-side additional effect period counter. Also, the data range to be referred to in the data table for executing the additional effect read out to the effect side RAM 94 is updated in accordance with the start of the new game this time. For example, if it is the 1st game in the effect side additional period, the data range of the 1st game in the above data table will be the reference object, and if it is the 2nd game in the effect side additional period, the data range of the 2nd game in the above data table will be referred. is a reference target, and if it is the 10th game in the performance-side additional period, the data range of the 10th game in the data table is the reference target.

Returning to the description of the effect control processing for the pseudo bonus (FIG. 50), after executing the effect side additional period processing in step S2802, it is determined whether or not the game start command is received (step S2803). As already described, the game start command is transmitted when the main side MPU 72 executes step S713 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). That is, the game start command is transmitted when one game is newly started.

If a game start command has been received (step S2803: YES), whether or not the number of bets in the game started this time is "2", or the state is CB (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) It is determined whether or not (step S2804). As already explained, when the game is started in a situation where the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "3", the main MPU 72 sets the first bet number When the command is transmitted and the game is started in a situation where the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "2", a second bet number command is transmitted in step S604 in the setting process at the time of opening (FIG. 15). . If the second bet number command has been received, an affirmative determination is made in step S2804. Further, since the game start command includes information corresponding to the current game state, if information indicating the CB state is set in the game start command, an affirmative determination is made in step S2804. .

If a negative determination is made in step S2804, it means that one game has been completed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 managed by the main MPU 72. FIG. Therefore, 1 is subtracted from the value of the continuous game number counter for grasping and the value of the continuous game number counter for display in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2805).

An affirmative determination in step S2804 means that a game with a bet number of "2" or a CB state game has been executed during the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, the main MPU 72 does not treat the game as being executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. On the other hand, in order to make the progress of the effect in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 smooth, the effect-side MPU 92 is set even if a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in the CB state is executed during the pseudo-bonus state ST4. An effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is advanced. Therefore, in step S2806, the value of the continuous game number counter for display in the effect side RAM 94 is decremented by 1, but the value of the continuous game number counter for grasp in the effect side RAM 94 is not decremented by 1. As a result, the number of games grasped as the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the effect-side MPU 92 is matched with the number of remaining continuous games managed by the main-side MPU 72, while the image display device 63 It is possible to make the player recognize that the remaining number of continuous games has decreased as the game is executed.

When the process of step S2805 or the process of step S2806 is executed, the pseudo bonus presentation progress process is executed (step S2807). In the process of progressing the pseudo-bonus effect, the data range to be referred to in the first pseudo-bonus data table or the second pseudo-bonus data table read out to the effect-side RAM 94 is set so as to correspond to the next game. Update to data range. As a result, the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 progresses with the start of a new game.

After that, on condition that the value of the continuous game number counter for display is "0" (step S2808: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous game number counter for grasping is 1 or more. (Step S2809). As already explained, when the second addition command is transmitted by winning in the first addition lottery process (step S2610) executed by the main side MPU 72, the production side MPU 92 performs the stock lottery process ( Step S2904) is executed, and when a stock prize is won, the number of additional games selected in the first additional lottery process (step S2610) is added to the number-of-continued-games counter for grasping, while It is not added to the continuous game counter. In addition, when a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in CB state is executed during the addition period, While the minimum number of games is added to the number-of-continued-games counter for display, the second addition lottery process (step S2614) in the game executed in the subsequent addition period and not the production side addition period. A number of games larger than the minimum number of games may be selected as a result, and the selected number of games is added to the continuous game number counter for grasping purposes. Further, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the value of the continuous game number counter for display is decremented by one. The value of the continuous game number counter is not decremented. In other words, in a situation where the number-of-games image G32 is displayed on the image display device 63, the number of games displayed in the number-of-games image G32 is smaller than the actual number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. can occur.

If the value of the continuous game number counter for display is "0" (step S2808: YES) and the value of the continuous game number counter for grasping is "0" (step S2809: NO), the pseudo-bonus state ST4. means that is terminated. In this case, pre-end effect setting processing is executed (step S2810). In the pre-end effect setting process, a data table for executing an effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends in the current game is read from the effect-side ROM 93 to the effect-side RAM 94.例文帳に追加As a result, the image display device 63 starts the pre-end effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is over, and the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 execute the effect corresponding to the display effect.

If the value of the continuous game number counter for display is "0" (step S2808: YES) and the value of the continuous game number counter for grasping is 1 or more (step S2809: YES), the effect of the effect side RAM 94 It is determined whether or not the side ending flag is set to "1" (step S2811). As already described, the effect-side ending flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the ending flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". When the effect side ending flag is not set to "1" in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the game number image G32 is displayed on the image display device 63, and the effect side ending flag is set to "1" in the pseudo bonus state ST4. If so, the image display device 63 does not display the number-of-games image G32.

If the effect-side ending flag is set to "1" (step S2811: YES), the number-of-games image G32 is not displayed on the image display device 63 in the first place. Even if the value of the continuous game number counter for display becomes "0" in a situation where the value is 1 or more and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 continues, the player is not notified of this situation. Therefore, in this case, by not executing the processing of steps S2812 to S2815, the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 that has been executed until then is continued.

If the effect-side ending flag is not set to "1" (step S2811: NO), the number-of-games image G32 is displayed on the image display device 63, so the value of the number-of-continued-games counter for grasping is 1. As described above, the number of games displayed in the number-of-games image G32 becomes "0" in the situation where the pseudo-bonus state ST4 continues. In this case, by executing the processes of steps S2812 to S2815, an effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is continued is executed.

Concretely, first, execution lottery processing of resurrection effect is executed (step S2812). In the resurrection performance execution lottery process, it is determined by lottery which of the normal continuation performance and the resurrection performance is to be executed as a performance indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 is continued. In the normal continuation effect, after the current game is started and the game number displayed in the game number image G32 of the image display device 63 becomes "0", the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is continued. , and an effect indicating that the number of games corresponding to the value set in the number-of-continued-games counter for comprehension has been awarded. Then, the number of games displayed as a grant target in the effect is added to the number of games displayed in the number-of-games image G32.

In the resurrection effect, after the current game is started and the number of games displayed in the game number image G32 of the image display device 63 becomes "0", there is a pre-end effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends. be started. Then, when the relevant game ends and a new game is started, an effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is actually continued, and the value set in the continuous game number counter for grasping. An effect indicating that the number of games to be played has been given is executed. Then, the number of games displayed as a grant target in the effect is added to the number of games displayed in the number-of-games image G32.

In the resurrection effect execution lottery process (step S2812), the execution winning of the resurrection effect has a probability of 20%. When the execution winning of the resurrection effect is not won (step S2813: NO), setting processing of normal continuous effect is executed (step S2814). In the normal continuation effect setting process, after the current game is started and the game number displayed in the game number image G32 of the image display device 63 becomes "0", the pseudo bonus state ST4 is continued. and an effect indicating that the number of games corresponding to the value set in the continuous game number counter for grasping has been awarded, and furthermore, the number of games displayed as the award target in the effect is the game A data table for adding to the number of games displayed in the number image G32 is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 . In addition, in the normal continuous effect setting process, the value set in the continuous game number counter for grasping is set in the continuous game number counter for display.

When execution of resurrection effect is won (step S2813: YES). A resurrection effect setting process is executed (step S2815). In the resurrection effect setting process, after the current game is started and the number of games displayed in the number-of-games image G32 of the image display device 63 becomes "0", the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends. When the pre-rendering is started and the game is ended and a new game is started, a performance indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is actually continued and a continuous game number counter for grasping is set. An effect indicating that the number of games corresponding to the given value has been given is executed, and the number of games displayed as the object to be given in the effect is added to the number of games displayed in the number-of-games image G32. A data table is read from the performance-side ROM 93 to the performance-side RAM 94. Also, in the resurrection effect setting process, the value set in the grasping continuous game number counter is set in the continuous game number counter for display.

In the pseudo-bonus effect control process, in addition to the above processes, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received in step S2816 (step S2816). If an ending command has been received (step S2816: YES), the number of remaining games is hidden (step S2817). In the non-display processing of the number of remaining games, the effect-side ending flag of the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1". Also, the number-of-games image G32 displayed on the image display device 63 is prevented from being displayed. As a result, when there is a high possibility that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied while the pseudo-bonus state ST4 progresses, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not reported. It becomes possible to

In the pseudo-bonus effect control process, in addition to the above-described processes, it is determined in step S2818 whether or not the end command of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the second section initialization command is received (step S2818). As already explained, the termination command of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 terminates the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in a situation where the second section SC2 continues even after the termination of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the normal operation is performed without intervening the termination preparation state ST5. This command is sent from the main MPU 72 when shifting to the game state ST1. As already explained, the second interval initialization command is a command sent from the main MPU 72 when the second interval SC2 ends.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2818, end effect setting processing is executed (step S2819). In the end effect setting process, a data table is transferred from the effect ROM 93 to the effect RAM 94 so that the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed after the effect indicating transition to the normal game state ST1 is executed. is read out to As a result, an effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed after the effect indicating transition to the normal game state ST1 is executed in the image display device 63, and the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 correspond to the display effect. A production is executed.

Next, how the pseudo-bonus state ST4 progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 53(a) shows the period during which one game is executed, FIG. 53(b) shows the period of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, FIG. 53(c) shows the period of the normal game state ST1, and FIG. (d) shows the period during which the pre-end effect indicating the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed, and FIG. 53(e) shows the period during which the revival effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 continues. 53(f) shows the period in which the end preparation state ST5 is present, and FIG. 53(g) shows the period in which the section display section 67 is in the lighting state.

First, the case where the resurrection effect is executed will be described.

At the timing t1, the first game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed as shown in FIG. 53(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 53(b), the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has already been set when the previous game ends. Further, since the section display section 67 is in the lighting state at the timing before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the section display section 67 is in the lighting state even at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 53(g). It's becoming

After that, at the timing of t2, a new one game is started in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 53(a). In this game, the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 1 or more, but the value of the continuous game number counter for display in the effect-side RAM 94 is "0", and the game on the image display device 63 The number of games of the number image G32 is "0". Then, it is decided to execute the resurrection effect in the game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53(d), at the timing t2, which is the timing at which the current game is started, the pre-end effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is over is started. FIG. 54(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution contents of the pre-end effect in the image display device 63. FIG. As shown in FIG. 54(a), in the pre-end effect, a pre-end image G51 indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends is displayed. The image display device 63 displays a game number image G32 and a winning number image G33 separately from the pre-end image G51, and the number of games displayed in the game number image G32 is "0".

After that, at timing t3, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 53(a). In this case, at the timing t3, the pre-end effect is terminated as shown in FIG. 53(d) and the revival effect is started as shown in FIG. 53(e). FIG. 54(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution contents of the resurrection effect in the image display device 63. FIG. As shown in FIG. 54(b), in the resurrection effect, a resurrection image G52 is displayed to indicate that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is continued rather than ending the pseudo-bonus state ST4. As a result, the player who has recognized that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will end due to the pre-end effect can be made to recognize that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will actually continue. In addition, in the resurrection effect, the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is notified, and the notified number of games is added to the number of games displayed in the number-of-games image G32. Note that the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state as shown in FIG. 53(g) during all the above periods.

Next, the case where the second section SC2 continues when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends will be described.

At the timing of t4, the first game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed as shown in FIG. 53(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 53(b), the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has already been set when the previous game ends. Further, since the section display section 67 is in the lighting state at the timing before shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST4, the section display section 67 is in the lighting state even at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 53(g). It's becoming

Thereafter, at time t5, a new game is started in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 53(a). This game is the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53(d), at the timing t5, which is the timing at which the current game is started, the pre-end effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is over is started. After that, the pre-end effect is ended as shown in FIG. 53(d) at the timing t6 which is the end timing after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

This time, even if the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the second section SC2 does not end. Therefore, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIGS. 53(b) and 53(c), the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and the normal game state ST1 is started without transitioning to the end preparation state ST5. In addition, the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state as shown in FIG. 53(g) during all the above periods. After that, at the timing of t7, the first game after shifting to the normal game state ST1 is started as shown in FIG. 53(a).

When the second section SC2 continues after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends as described above, the section display section 67 is kept lit. Therefore, even at the timing after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the interval display section 67 is lit. Thus, in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in which the pre-end effect is executed, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends even if the section display section 67 is confirmed at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely stopped. cannot be specified. Therefore, the player can expect that the resurrection effect will be executed at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are completely stopped in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the situation where the pre-end effect is being executed. It becomes possible, and it is possible to maintain the expectation for the continuation of the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

Next, the case where the second section SC2 ends when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends will be described.

At the timing of t8, the first game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed as shown in FIG. 53(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 53(b), the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has already been set when the previous game ends. Further, since the section display section 67 is in the lighting state at the timing before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the section display section 67 is in the lighting state even at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. 53(g). It's becoming

After that, at timing t9, a new game is started in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 53(a). This game is the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53(d), at the timing t9, which is the timing at which the current game is started, the pre-end effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is over is started. Thereafter, at timing t10, which is the end timing after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has stopped, the pre-end effect is ended as shown in FIG. 53(d). .

This time, the second section SC2 ends when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends. Therefore, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIGS. 53(b) and 53(f), the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and shifts to the end preparation state ST5. After that, in the end preparation state ST5, the game is executed from timing t11 to timing t12 as shown in FIG. 53(a). Then, at the timing of t12 when the game ends, as shown in FIGS. 53(c) and 53(f), the end preparation state ST5 ends and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Also, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 53(g), the section display section 67 switches from the lit state to the extinguished state. After that, at the timing of t13, the first game after shifting to the normal game state ST1 is started as shown in FIG. 53(a).

At the timing of t10, an effect is started indicating that the current pseudo-bonus state ST4 is over and the game is shifted to the normal game state ST1. This effect is continued until the timing of t12, which is the timing at which the end preparation state ST5 ends. However, it is not limited to this configuration, and the pre-end effect is continued until the next game is started for the game in which the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended, and when the next game is started, this time A configuration may also be adopted in which an effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is terminated and a shift to the normal game state ST1 is started.

If the second section SC2 ends when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends as described above, after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the end preparation state ST5 for one game is entered, and in the end preparation state ST5, the section The display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state. Therefore, even at the timing after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the interval display section 67 is lit. Thus, in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in which the pre-end effect is executed, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends even if the section display part 67 is confirmed at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely stopped. cannot be specified. Therefore, the player can expect that the resurrection effect will be executed at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are completely stopped in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the situation where the pre-end effect is being executed. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to maintain the expectation for the continuation of the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

Next, how the number of games is increased during the additional period and how the number of games is increased will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 55(a) shows the situation of the extra period managed by the main side MPU 72, FIG. 55(b) shows the period during which the game with the bet number "3" is executed, c) shows the period during which the game with the number of bets of "2" is being executed, FIG. ) indicates the timing when the number of games is added, FIG. 55(f) indicates the timing when the additional effect progresses as the game is completed, and FIG. 55(g) indicates that the number of games has been added. indicates the timing of

First, the case where the game with the number of bets of "2" and the game in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) are not executed during the extra period will be described.

At the timing of t1, the addition period is started as shown in FIG. 55(a), and the performance side addition period is started as shown in FIG. 55(d). After that, as shown in FIG. 55(b), a game with a bet number of "3" is repeatedly executed in the additional period including timings t2, t3 and t4. In this case, when each game is started as shown in FIG. 55(e), the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is added, and as shown in FIG. Accompanying this, the effect of the addition period progresses, and as shown in FIG. 55(g), the number of games to be added in each game is notified. Then, at the timing of t5, the number of continuous games remaining in the additional period becomes "0", thereby ending the additional period as shown in FIG. period ends.

Next, a case where a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the middle of the addition period will be described.

At the timing of t6, the addition period is started as shown in FIG. 55(a), and the performance side addition period is started as shown in FIG. 55(d). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(b), a game with a bet number of "3" is executed at a timing t7. In this case, as shown in FIG. 55(e), the number of remaining games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is added, and as shown in FIG. , as shown in FIG. 55(f), the number of games to be added is reported.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(c), a game with a bet number of "2" is executed at each of timing t8 and timing t9. In this case, as shown in FIG. 55(e), the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not added in each game, but as shown in FIG. The effect progresses, and as shown in FIG. 55(g), the number of additional games is announced for each game. The number of add-on games notified here can be selected in the second add-on lottery process (step S2614) when a game in which the number of bets is "3" and is not in the CB state is executed during the add-on period. The number of games is the minimum number of games (specifically, 10 games).

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(b), a game with a bet number of "3" is repeatedly executed during the extra period including timings t10 and t11. In this case, when each game is started as shown in FIG. 55(e), the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is added, and as shown in FIG. Accompanying this, the effect of the addition period progresses, and as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing of t12, the number of remaining continuous games in the effect-side additional period measured by the effect-side MPU 92 becomes "0", thereby ending the effect-side additional period as shown in FIG. 55(d). . In this case, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 terminate the effect indicating that it is the additional period, and restart the execution of the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and not the additional period. be. However, since the number of continuing games remaining in the additional period measured by the main MPU 72 is still 1 or more, the additional period continues as shown in FIG. 55(a).

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(b), a game with a bet number of "3" is executed at each of timing t13 and timing t14. In this case, as shown in FIG. 55(e), when each game is started, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is added, but as shown in FIG. The corresponding effect has ended, and the number of games to be added in each game is not reported as shown in FIG. 55(g). Therefore, even though the number of remaining games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is added, the player is not notified of it. Further, the number of additional games provided at timing t13 and timing t14 is equal to or greater than the number of additional games notified at timing t8 and timing t9 when the game with the bet number "2" is executed. is the number of games.

At the timing of t15, the number of continuous games remaining in the additional period measured by the main MPU 72 becomes "0". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the add-on period ends at the timing of t15.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs in the second section SC2. Therefore, the player who expects the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 expects the second section SC2. In this case, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the second section SC2 may be continued, and the game state may shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the continued second section SC2. be. As a result, even if the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends once, the player can expect the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to occur further.

When the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state is entered upon completion of the second section SC2 even if the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not "0". ST4 ends. This makes it possible to prevent the pseudo-bonus state ST4 from continuing for an excessively long time. Further, there is not only the case where the second section SC2 continues when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, but also the case where both the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the second section SC2 end. This makes it possible to diversify whether or not the second section SC2 continues when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends.

In the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, when the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches or exceeds a second reference number of games, which is the number of games smaller than the upper limit number of games, or the game medium is limited. When the total net increase number becomes equal to or larger than the second reference acquisition number, which is a number smaller than the upper limit net increase number, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is forced. As a result, in the situation where the second section SC2 is in the normal game state ST1, when the fulfillment of the ending condition of the second section SC2 reaches the near end period, the benefit of the occurrence of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is given. becomes possible. Therefore, although the second section SC2 continues even after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the second section SC2 does not end without further transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It becomes possible to

A situation in which the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the first reference number of games, which is the number of games less than the upper limit number of games, or a situation in which the total net increase in number of game media with restrictions is less than the upper limit net increase in number of games. When the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends in a situation where the number of wins is equal to or greater than 1 reference number, the second section SC2 also ends. As a result, in a situation where the ending condition of the second section SC2 is about to be satisfied, it is possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends. Therefore, even though the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has taken place, the ending condition of the second section SC2 is immediately satisfied, and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends along with the end of the second section SC2. It is possible to prevent such an event from occurring.

A situation in which the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the first standard number of games, which is the number of games less than the upper limit number of games, or a situation in which the total net increase in number of game media with restrictions is less than the upper limit net increase in number of games. In a situation where the obtained number is equal to or greater than 1 reference number, the number of games is not added to the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 even if an additional opportunity occurs. As a result, even though the number of games is increased, the ending condition of the second section SC2 is established before the added number of games is completed, and the second section SC2 ends, resulting in a pseudo bonus. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event that the state ST4 is also terminated.

A situation in which the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the first standard number of games, which is the number of games less than the upper limit number of games, or a situation in which the total net increase in number of game media with restrictions is less than the upper limit net increase in number of games. In a situation where the number of wins is one reference number or more, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not reported. As a result, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends due to the fulfillment of the ending condition of the second section SC2 despite the fact that the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 1 or more, the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to make it difficult.

A period in which the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1" and the value of the transition standby counter is 1 or more, and none of the first to third transition confirmation flags are set to "1". In the transition waiting period, which is any of the periods in which the value of the number-of-released-games counter 74e is 5 or less, if the lottery process (FIG. 16) wins the index value IV=10, the right reel is selected. A notification (hereinafter also referred to as special notification) is executed to enable the player to recognize that 32R should be stopped first. In this situation, a special bell prize can be established by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so as to stop the right reel 32R for the first time. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the game state is about to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 by using the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

Even if a special bell win is established during the transition waiting period, the gaming state does not shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 until a predetermined number of games (specifically, 5 games) are completed during the transition waiting period. The transition waiting period continues. As a result, the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R can be used to indicate that the game state is approaching the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without affecting the timing of the game state transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It is possible to notify the player.

If a special bell win is established during the transition standby period, the above special notification is not executed even if the index value IV=10 is won again in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) during the transition standby period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special notification from being excessively executed to the player who already recognizes that the game state is about to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 due to the establishment of the special bell winning. It becomes possible.

If the special bell prize is not established in response to the fact that the index value IV=10 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the role during the transition standby period and the special notification is executed, the winning of the role is not established during the transition standby period. When the index value IV=10 is won again in the lottery process (FIG. 16), the special notification is executed again. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of winning a special bell prize during the transition waiting period.

When the shift waiting period elapses without winning the index value IV=10 in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the image display device 63 or the like executes a non-win finalizing effect. As a result, the player is made aware that even if the index value IV=10 is not won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) during the shift standby period, the game state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. becomes possible.

If the index value IV=10 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) in a situation other than the transition waiting period, a notification (hereinafter referred to as a predetermined Also called notification) is executed. Then, in this situation, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R so as to stop the left reel 32L for the first time, the first bell prize is established. As a result, the special bell winning is established during the transition waiting period, and the player's attention to the establishment of the special bell winning can be increased.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the number of games to be played remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may be added, and when the number is added, the number of games required until the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends increases. Therefore, the player expects the addition to occur in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, the addition can occur in the target game (the game in which the number of bets is "3" without being in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3), whereas the above addition can occur in the non-target game (the first CB state ST2, In the second CB state ST3 (game with the number of bets of "2"), the addition does not occur. This makes it possible to impose certain restrictions on the situations in which the above addition can be carried out.

In the game where the number of bets is "3", the above-mentioned addition can occur, but in the game where the number of bets is "2", the above-mentioned addition does not occur. As a result, the player can basically play a game in which the number of bets is "3".

In a configuration in which a game with a bet number of "3" is more advantageous for a player than a game with a bet number of "2", the addition can occur in a game with a bet number of "3". On the other hand, in games where the number of bets is "2", the addition does not occur. As a result, by executing a game in which the number of bets is "3" in order to create an advantageous situation, the addition can be automatically executed.

Even if the non-target game is executed during the additional period, not only is the additional game not executed, but the additional period itself does not progress when the non-target game is executed during the additional period. As a result, even if a non-target game is accidentally executed during the additional period, the event that the additional period progresses despite the fact that the above addition is not executed does not occur. It becomes possible to do so.

During the add-on period, the add-on effect is executed. This makes it possible to increase the attention of the player to the additional period. In this case, when the non-target game is executed during the additional period, progress of the additional period is stopped, whereas progress of the effect-side additional period is continued. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the non-target game is executed during the additional period.

If a non-targeted game is executed during the additional period, the progress of the additional period is stopped in the non-targeted game, whereas the production side additional period progresses, so that the game before the game in which the additional period ends In the game, the production side addition period ends. As a result, even if the non-target game is executed during the additional period, the additional effect corresponding to the predetermined number of games can be executed.

If the addition is executed while the addition period continues even after the performance-side addition period ends, the player is not notified of the occurrence of the addition. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who recognizes that the addition period has ended because the addition period on the performance side has already ended from giving a sense of incongruity.

In a configuration in which the above-mentioned addition occurs in each game during the addition period, if a non-target game is executed during the addition period on the production side, even though the above-mentioned addition is not actually executed, in each game during the addition period A notification indicating that the minimum number of games among the number of games to be added is added is executed. As a result, while giving the player the impression that the above-mentioned addition occurs in each game during the addition period, the player is notified that the number of addition games that is larger than the number of addition games actually given during the addition period is given. It is possible to prevent it from being executed.

When the non-target game is executed, the above addition is not executed, but the process for bringing the ending condition of the second section SC2 closer to being satisfied is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of disadvantage of executing a non-target game.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the combination of symbols that establishes the first CB prize is different from that in the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 56(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination of symbols for establishing the first CB prize and the combination of symbols for establishing the second CB prize in this embodiment.

As in the first embodiment, the combination of symbols for the 2nd CB winning is that the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is "White 7" and the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is "White 7" on the main line ML. This is a combination in which the symbols stopped on the right reel 32R are "BAR" symbols. On the left reel 32L, five or more symbols pass through the main line ML after the "WHITE 7" pattern passes over the main line ML until the next "WHITE 7" pattern passes over the main line ML. Further, on the middle reel 32M, five or more symbols must pass the main line ML after the "WHITE 7" symbol passes over the main line ML until the next "WHITE 7" symbol passes over the main line ML. Become. Also, on the right reel 32R, five or more symbols pass through the main line ML after the "BAR" symbol passes over the main line ML until the next "BAR" symbol passes over the main line ML. Therefore, depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second CB prize may not be established even if the second CB combination is won.

On the other hand, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the symbol combination for the 1st CB prize is a "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L and a "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M on the main line ML. , and the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol. In the left reel 32L, the number of symbols passing through the main line ML after the "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML until the next "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML is 4 or less. . In the middle reel 32M, the number of symbols passing through the main line ML after the "replay" symbol passes over the main line ML until the next "replay" symbol passes over the main line ML is 4 symbols or less. is. In the right reel 32R, the number of symbols passing through the main line ML after the "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML until the next "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML is 4 symbols or less. is. Therefore, when the first CB combination is won, the first CB prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44.

FIG. 56(b) is a time chart showing the flow of the game when the first CB or second CB winning combination is won. FIG. 56(b1) shows a period in which a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, FIG. 56(b2) shows a period in which a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, and FIG. ) indicates the period during which the 1st CB combination is won, FIG. 56(b4) shows the period during which the 2nd CB combination is won, and FIG. 56(b5) shows the 1st CB state ST2 or the 2nd CB state. It shows the period of ST3.

First, the case where the first CB combination is won will be described.

At the timing of t1 when neither the first CB nor the second CB is won after the all-clearing process (step S105) is executed by the main MPU 72, as shown in FIG. 56(b1). A game with a bet number of "3" is started. In this case, the first CB combination is won at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 56(b3). After that, at the timing of t2, the current game ends as shown in FIG. 56(b1). In this case, the combination of symbols that has won the 1st CB role in the current game and also establishes the 1st CB prize is a combination of symbols that does not cause a so-called dropout. Therefore, when the first CB win is established at the timing of t2, the first CB winning state is canceled as shown in FIG. 56(b3) and the first CB state ST2 starts as shown in FIG. 56(b5). be done.

Next, the case where the second CB combination is won will be described.

At the timing of t3 when neither the first CB nor the second CB is won after the all-clearing process (step S105) is executed by the main MPU 72, as shown in FIG. 56(b2). A game with a bet number of "2" is started. In this case, the second CB combination is won at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 56(b4). After that, the game ends, but the combination of symbols that establishes the second CB prize is a combination of symbols that can cause a so-called dropout, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at the stop operation timing that does not establish the second CB prize. As a result, the 2nd CB prize is not established. After that, at timing t4, a game with a bet number of "2" is started as shown in FIG. 56(b2). The 2nd CB winning will not be established due to the operation.

After that, a game with the number of bets of "3" is started as shown in FIG. However, in a game where the number of bets is "3" even if the 2nd CB role is won, the 2nd CB prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. do not. After that, at timing t7, a game with a bet number of "2" is started as shown in FIG. 56(b2). The 2nd CB winning will not be established due to the operation.

According to the above configuration, the game with the bet number of "2" is executed first to make the second CB combination winning state, and then the game with the bet number of "3" is started. Instead, when the game was played in an unusual game method in which the number of bets was "3" in a situation in which the second CB role was not won, the first CB role was won. The first CB win is surely established in the game, and the game shifts to the first CB state ST2 which is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, even if an attempt is made to obtain an illegal profit by playing a game with a bet number of "3" after illegally executing the all-clearing process (step S105), the transition to the first CB state ST2 occurs. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the fraudulent person to obtain fraudulent profits.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in terms of the transition from one of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2 to the other. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the first control process of the game section in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 .

First, it is determined whether or not the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3101). The second section flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 whether or not the game section is the second section SC2. , and the first section SC1 is when the value of the second section flag is "0". If "1" is set in the second section flag (step S3101: YES), the processing after step S3102 is not executed. As a result, when the game is already in the second section SC2, it is possible not to execute the processing for newly setting the game section to the second section SC2 in steps S3105 to S3108.

If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S3101: NO), it is determined whether the current gaming state is the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) (step S3102). ). If the current gaming state is the CB state (step S3102: YES), the processing after step S3103 is not executed. As a result, even if the first section SC1 is in the CB state, it is possible to prevent the processing for newly setting the game section to the second section SC2 in steps S3105 to S3108. becomes.

If the current gaming state is not the CB state (step S3102: NO), by determining whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3", the bet number of this game is It is determined whether or not it is "3" (step S3103). If the number of bets for this game is "2" (step S3103: NO), the processing after step S3104 is not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the first section SC1, the processing for newly setting the game section to the second section SC2 in steps S3105 to S3108 is not executed. It becomes possible to

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S3103: YES), it is determined whether or not any index value IV has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current combination (step S3104). ). If the lottery process (FIG. 16) for this combination is lost (step S3104: NO), the processes after step S3105 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, when it is lost in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the game section in steps S3105 to S3108 is newly set to the second section SC2. It is possible to prevent the processing from being executed.

In the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current role, if any index value IV is won (step S3104: YES), the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the main RAM 74 The continuous game number counter 74c and the total winning number counter 74d are each cleared to "0" (step S3105). The second section SC2 is set by setting the second section flag to "1".

After that, the branch wait flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3106). The branch standby flag indicates the state after transition to the second section SC2, which is the state of the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1 and the state of the second section SC2 and the pseudo-bonus state ST4. This is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that it is a period in which it has not been decided whether to set the state. In the present embodiment, as will be described later in detail, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the game subsequent to the game shifted to the second section SC2, a pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs, When a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the game subsequent to the game shifted to the 2-segment SC2, the normal game state ST1 is continued. In a situation where the branch waiting flag is set to "1", the game state branching has not yet occurred after the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred.

After that, the branch wait counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3107). The branch wait counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to determine whether or not a new game has been started in a situation where the branch wait flag is set to "1". When one game ends in a situation where the branch wait flag is set to "1", the value of the branch wait counter is decremented by 1, and the value of the branch wait counter becomes "0". Then, when the next game ends, it is specified that the branch waiting flag is set to "1" and the value of the branch waiting counter is "0". Distribution of the corresponding game state is executed.

After that, lighting processing of the section display section 67 is executed (step S3108). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that it is the second section SC2.

FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing normal processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 .

If "1" is set in the branch wait flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3201: YES), if the value of the branch wait counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3202: NO), the current game Since it means that the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred at the start, the value of the branch waiting counter is decremented by 1 (step S3203), and then the normal processing ends. As a result, in the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred, the state where the second section SC2 is the normal game state ST1 or the situation where the second section SC2 is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is entered. No apportionment.

On the other hand, if the branch wait flag is set to "1" (step S3201: YES) and the value of the branch wait counter is "0" (step S3202: YES), the current game is the second game. The branch wait flag is cleared to "0" because it means that the game is the next game after the game in which the transition to section SC2 has occurred (step S3204). Then, if the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S3205: YES), the processing for starting the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in steps S3206 and S3207 is executed, and the number of bets for the current game is is "2" (step S3205: NO), the process for continuing the normal game state ST1 in steps S3208 and S3209 is executed.

As a process for starting the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a start setting process is first executed (step S3206). In the start setting process, the pseudo-bonus state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the pseudo-bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to 40 games, which is the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. set the value corresponding to . The pseudo-bonus state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It is a counter for specifying in .

After that, a start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3207). The start command is a command indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has newly started. Further, the start command includes information indicating that the current initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 40 games. When the start command is received, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, on the image display device 63, a moving image corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is displayed, and a display indicating the number of remaining games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the number of game media obtained in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are displayed. is displayed.

As a process for continuing the normal game state ST1, first, a lottery process for the number of unlocked games is executed (step S3208). The number of unlocked games is defined as the number of games to be unlocked, in the case where the normal game state ST1 is not won in the unlock lottery process (step S3218) to be described later, the state of the normal game state ST1 ends in the second section SC2 and the first section SC1. This counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games required until the transition to . In the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, first, the lottery table for the number of unlocked games pre-stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 . Then, the number of unlocked games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter against the lottery table of the number of unlocked games. In this case, one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of unlocked games. In addition, the selection probabilities for each number of unlocked games are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the probability of selecting the number of unlocked games with a large number of games is set high, or the probability of selecting the number of unlocked games with a small number of games is set high. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which After executing the unlocked game number lottery process, the unlocked game number selected in the unlocked game number lottery process is set in the unlocked game number counter 74e (see FIG. 9) of the main RAM 74 (step S3209). The unlocked game number counter 74e is a counter for specifying the number of remaining unlocked games in the main MPU 72 .

In the normal processing (FIG. 58), when the branch wait flag of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S3201: NO), the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". is the second section SC2 (step S3210: YES), it is determined whether the current gaming state is the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) (step S3211 ). If the current gaming state is the CB state (step S3211: YES), the processing after step S3212 is not executed. In the processing after step S3212, the number of games required to end the situation of the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1 is subtracted as one game is played, and the number of games is subtracted as the game is played. If the conditions for terminating the situation are satisfied, the processing for terminating the second segment SC2 is executed. In this case, if it is in the CB state, by not executing the processing after step S3212, even if the game is completed in the CB state, it will be the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1. It is possible to prevent it from becoming a factor that brings the end closer.

If it is not in the CB state (step S3211: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3", so that the number of bets for this game is "3". It is determined whether or not (step S3212). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S3212: NO), the processes after step S3213 are not executed. As already explained, in the processing after step S3213, the number of games required to end the second section SC2 and the state of the normal game state ST1 is subtracted as one game is played, and the number of games is reduced. When the conditions for ending the situation are satisfied as the situation is resolved, the process for ending the second section SC2 is executed. In this case, if the game with the bet number of "2" is executed, the processes after step S3213 are not executed, so that even if the game with the bet number of "2" is completed, it is the first game. It is possible to prevent the situation from approaching the end of the situation in which the two-section SC2 is the normal game state ST1.

When the number of bets for this game is "3" (step S3212: YES), the value of the unlocked game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S3213). Then, if the value of the number-of-released-games counter 74e after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3214: YES), the setting processing of the end preparation state ST5 is executed (step S3215). In the setting process, the termination preparation state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the end preparation state ST5 is set, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST5. Thereafter, the termination preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3216). As already described, the end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST5.

In the end preparation state ST5, as in the first embodiment, the affirmative determination is made in step S1902 in the second control process (FIG. 38) of the game section, and the end preparation completion flag is not set to "1". If so (step S1903: NO), after setting the end preparation completion flag to "1", a process for specifying whether or not the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is executed, and the game section in the current game The second control process (FIG. 38) ends. On the other hand, if the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S1903: YES), processing for ending the second section SC2 and shifting to the first section SC1 is executed (steps S1914 to S1916). ). As a result, the second section SC2 ends. It should be noted that if the end preparation state ST5 is not set and the value of the canceled game number counter 74e becomes "0", the second section SC2 may be ended in that game.

If the value of the number-of-released-games counter 74e after subtracting 1 is not "0" (step S3214: NO), one of the index values IV=11 to 15 was won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current combination. It is determined whether or not (step S3217). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3217, a cancellation lottery process is executed (step S3218). In the release lottery process, a lottery is used to determine whether or not to end the second section SC2, using a table for release lottery provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74.例文帳に追加In the lottery process (Fig. 16) for the role in the current game, if the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 20% chance that the second section SC2 will be terminated, and the index value IV = 12. If the lottery is won, it is canceled to end the second section SC2 with a probability of 10%, and if the index value IV=13 is won, it is canceled to end the second section SC2 with a probability of 40%. Thus, if the index value IV=14 is won, there is a 30% probability that the second section SC2 will be terminated, and if the index value IV=15 is won, the second section SC2 will be canceled with a 20% probability. It will be a cancellation election that ends the 2nd section SC2. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of being canceled to end the second section SC2. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

If the cancellation is won in the cancellation lottery process (step S3219: YES), the end preparation state ST5 setting process is executed in step S3215, and the end preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in step S3216. do. The processing contents of these steps S3215 and S3216 are as already explained. As a result, the game state becomes the end preparation state ST5, and the second section SC2 ends in the game next to the current game, and shifts to the first section SC1. It should be noted that the second section SC2 may be terminated in the game when the termination preparation state ST5 is not set and the cancellation lottery process results in a cancellation winning.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the pseudo-bonus processing in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG.

In steps S3301 to S3308, the same processes as steps S2701 to S2708 of the pseudo-bonus process (FIG. 49) in the first embodiment are executed. When a negative determination is made in step S3304, when the process of step S3307 is executed, or when the process of step S3308 is executed, it is checked whether the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 is "0". Determine (step S3309). If the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S3309: YES), the pseudo-bonus status flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3310). After that, lottery processing for the number of unlocked games is executed (step S3311).

As already described, the number of unlocked games is the first number after the normal game state ST1 ends in the second section SC2 when the normal game state ST1 is not won in the unlock lottery process (step S3216). This counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games required until the transition to the section SC1 occurs. In the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, first, the lottery table for the number of unlocked games pre-stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 . Then, the number of unlocked games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter against the lottery table of the number of unlocked games. In this case, one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of unlocked games. In addition, the selection probabilities for each number of unlocked games are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the probability of selecting the number of unlocked games with a large number of games is set high, or the probability of selecting the number of unlocked games with a small number of games is set high. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which After executing the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, the number of unlocked games selected in the lottery process for the number of unlocked games is set in the unlocked game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S3312).

Thereafter, a command to end the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S3313). The end command of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a command for making the effect-side MPU 92 recognize that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the end command of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the upper lamp 61, the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is started after the effect indicating the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed. It controls the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 .

Next, how the second section SC2 progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 60(a) shows the second section SC2, FIG. 60(b) shows the period during which the game with the bet number of "3" is being executed, and FIG. 60(c) shows the bet number of " 60(d) shows the period in which the game is in the normal game state ST1, FIG. 60(e) shows the period in which the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and FIG. ) indicates the timing when the number of remaining games to be unlocked becomes "0", and FIG.

In the first section SC1, a game with a bet number of "3" is executed at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 60(b). The game is not in the CB state (the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3), but in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination executed in the game, any winning combination is won. Therefore, at the timing of t1, the game section shifts from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 60(a).

After that, the next game is started at the timing t2 for the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred. In this case, the game started at the timing t2 is a game with a bet number of "2" as shown in FIG. 60(c). In the game following the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred, the second section SC2 is the normal game state ST1 or the second section SC2 is the pseudo-bonus state ST4. A branch will occur. When a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed as the game, as shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(d), the state of the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1 continues. It will happen.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60(b), a game with a bet number of "3" is repeated including timings t3 and t4. Then, the game with the number of bets "3" started at timing t4 is executed, and at timing t5, which is the timing at which the game ends, the remaining unlocked games are displayed as shown in FIG. 60(f). The number becomes "0". Therefore, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 60(a), the second section SC2 ends and the game section becomes the first section SC1. That is, the state is the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

After that, in the situation of the first section SC1, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 60(b), a game with a bet number of "3" is executed. The game is not in the CB state (the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3), but in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination executed in the game, any winning combination is won. Therefore, at the timing of t6, the game section shifts from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 60(a).

After that, the next game is started at the timing of t7 for the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred. In this case, the game started at the timing t7 is a game with the bet number of "3" as shown in FIG. 60(b). In the game following the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred, the second section SC2 is the normal game state ST1 or the second section SC2 is the pseudo-bonus state ST4. A branch will occur. When a game with a bet number of "3" is executed as the game, at the timing t8, which is the timing at which the game ends, the normal game state ST1 is entered as shown in FIGS. 60(d) and 60(e). is completed and the state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60(b), a game with a bet number of "3" is repeated including timings t9 and t10. Then, by executing the game with the bet number of "3" which is started at the timing of t10, the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is reduced to "0" at the timing of t11 when the game ends. ”. Therefore, at the timing of t11, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and the normal game state ST1 starts as shown in FIGS. 60(d) and 60(e). That is, the state is the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the game with the number of bets of "3" is repeated including timings t12 and t13. Then, in the cancellation lottery process (step S3218) executed at timing t14, which is the end timing of the game in which the number of bets is "3", started at timing t13, as shown in FIG. As a result, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 60(a), the second section SC2 ends and the game section becomes the first section SC1. That is, the state is the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

In the second section SC2 and in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, or the total net increase in number of game media with restrictions in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase. When the number of coins is reached, the second section SC2 and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are ended, and the situation becomes the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. In addition, in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1, the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, or the total net increase number with the limitation of the game media in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase. When the number of coins is reached, the second section SC2 ends, and the situation becomes the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Although the second section SC2 continues when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur again in the continued second section SC2. As a result, the situation in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is restricted after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 once ends while the transition condition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when the second section SC2 is newly started is fixed. It can be forcibly generated.

The second section SC2 ends when the release condition is established in the state of the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2. When the second section SC2 ends, a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 can occur as the second section SC2 starts anew. Therefore, the player expects that the cancellation condition is satisfied in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1.

In a configuration in which the normal game state ST1 is set in the second section SC2 after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the number of games to be released determined when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends is completed. Based on this, the second section SC2 ends. As a result, in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1, the player expects that the number of unlocked games will be completed early.

After the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is completed, the second section SC2 is the normal game state ST1, and the second section SC2 is completed by winning the cancellation lottery in the cancellation lottery process (step S3218). As a result, in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1, the player is informed that the cancellation lottery process (step S3218) will be executed and that the cancellation lottery process (step S3218) will be canceled. It will be expected.

When the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is also terminated when the second section SC2 ends even if the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 1 or more. do. This makes it possible to prevent the pseudo-bonus state ST4 from continuing for an excessively long time. Further, there is not only the case where the second section SC2 continues when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, but also the case where both the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the second section SC2 end. This makes it possible to diversify whether or not the second section SC2 continues when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends.

A game state transition to a pseudo-bonus state ST4 may occur based on the start of the second section SC2. As a result, the player expects the second section SC2 to end early in the situation where the second section SC2 is in the normal game state ST1.

The game next to the game in which the second section SC2 is started becomes a game to be branched, and a game with a bet number of "3" is executed as the game to be branched, whereby the game state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. occurs. As a result, when the second section SC2 is newly started, it is basically possible to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

When the game with the number of bets of "2" is executed as the game to be branched, the state is the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1. The manager of the gaming hall, who believes that it is not preferable to immediately transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 at the start of business of the gaming hall, generates the second section SC2 in advance and the bet number in the game to be branched is increased. By executing the game "2", it is possible to intentionally create a situation in which the second section SC2 is the normal game state ST1.

As described above, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs in the second section SC2 generated by executing the game with the number of bets "2" as the game to be branched and in the normal game state ST1. do not. As a result, it is possible to intentionally create a situation in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur for a while after the game hall starts operating.

The second section SC2 occurs based on the execution of the game with the bet number of "3" in the first section SC1. Therefore, it is considered that the player will play the game with the number of bets set to "3" even in the branching game. As a result, basically, when the second section SC2 newly occurs, it is possible to make the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occur.

In the first section SC1, the second section SC2 is set based on winning any combination in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). This makes it possible to cause the transition from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 to occur early.

The game set in the second interval SC2 is not limited to the configuration in which the game next to the game set in the second interval SC2 is the game to be branched. The game after the game may be a branch target game. Further, the number of games required for the game set in the second section SC2 to occur before the game to be branched may be determined by lottery.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the transition condition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when transitioning from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the winning lottery process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 .

In step S3401, as in step S701 of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first embodiment, a random number to be used when determining whether a winning combination is right or wrong is acquired. After that, the lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is read out from the main ROM 73 (step S3402). In the present embodiment, the winning lottery table for betting 3 cards is selected when the bet number is "3" in the non-CB state, and the combination lottery table is selected when the bet number is "2" in the non-CB state. The contents of the combination lottery table when two cards are bet are different from those in the first embodiment.

FIG. 62(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination lottery table for betting 3 coins in this embodiment, and FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination lottery table for betting 2 coins in this embodiment. is.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), the combination lottery table for betting 3 cards has index values IV of "1 to 17" as in the combination lottery table for betting 3 cards in the first embodiment (FIG. 17). is set. The point value PV set for each of these index values IV=1 to 17 is the same as the combination lottery table (FIG. 17) for betting 3 cards in the first embodiment. Winning data set for each of the index values IV=1 to 16 is the same as the combination lottery table (FIG. 17) for betting 3 coins in the first embodiment. However, the type of winning data set to the index value IV=17 is different from the combination lottery table (FIG. 17) for betting 3 cards in the first embodiment. Specifically, the index value IV=17 is set not only with the first CB winning data but also with the 10th compensation winning data.

FIG. 62(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination of symbols that establishes the tenth compensation winning prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the tenth supplementary prize is won. becomes. When the tenth supplementary prize is won, the number of game media to be given becomes “1”.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the combination lottery table for betting two cards, "1 to 17" are set as the index value IV in the same way as the combination lottery table for betting two cards in the first embodiment (FIG. 18). there is The point value PV set for each of these index values IV=1 to 17 is the same as the combination lottery table (FIG. 18) when betting two cards in the first embodiment. Winning data set for each of the index values IV=1 to 16 is the same as the combination lottery table (FIG. 18) for betting two cards in the first embodiment. However, the type of the winning data set to the index value IV=17 is different from the combination lottery table (FIG. 18) when two cards are bet in the first embodiment. Specifically, the index value IV=17 is set not only with the second CB winning data but also with the 10th complementary winning data.

FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the established prize mode when the combination lottery table for betting 3 or the combination lottery table for betting 2 is selected. is. As shown in FIG. 64, for index values IV=1 to 16, the relationship between the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the established winning mode is the same as in the first embodiment. If a win is made with the index value IV=17, regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, if the number of bets is "3", the 1st CB winning prize or the 10th supplementary winning prize is established, and the number of bets is " 2", the 2nd CB winning prize or the 10th compensation winning prize is established.

The combination of symbols that establishes the first CB prize and the combination of symbols that establishes the second CB prize are set so as not to stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. The combination of symbols that establishes the 10th compensation winning prize is set to stop on the main line ML regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. Then, when both the first CB winning data and the tenth supplementary winning data are set in the main RAM 74, or when both the second CB winning data and the tenth supplementary winning data are set in the main RAM 74, 10. The symbols that make up the combination of symbols that establish the compensation winning prize are prioritized on the main line ML over the symbols that make up the combination of symbols that make up the 1st CB winning prize and the symbols that make up the combination of symbols that make up the 2nd CB winning prize. to stop. Therefore, when winning with index value IV=17 regardless of whether the number of bets is "3" or "2", the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is Regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the 10th compensation winning prize is surely established, and the establishment of the 1st CB prize or the 2nd CB prize is avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first CB winning or the second CB winning from being established in the game in which the index value IV=17 is won.

When the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are stored in the main side RAM 74, they are stored and held in the main side RAM 74 until the corresponding CB winning is established. Therefore, even if the 10th supplementary prize is established preferentially in the game in which the index value IV=17 is won, the state in which the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 will not be available until the next game. It will be carried over.

Returning to the description of the winning lottery process (FIG. 61), after selecting the lottery table in step S3402, after setting the index value IV to "1" (step S3403), the judgment value used when judging whether the winning combination is right or wrong. DV is set (step S3404). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the value of the random number obtained in step S3401 is used as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the index value IV=1, which is the current index value IV, is set to this random number value. is added to obtain a new determination value DV.

After that, the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is determined (step S3405). Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds "65535" is judged in the winning judgment. If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S3405: NO), it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, after adding 1 to the index value IV (step S3406), it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined (step S3407). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S3404 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S3404, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S3405, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

If it exceeds "65535" (step S3405: YES), after executing the first control process of the game section (step S3408), the index value IV at that time and the data of the corresponding winning combination are stored in the main RAM74. Winning data acquisition processing for setting is executed (step S3409). That is, in the present embodiment, when any one of the index values IV=1 to 17 is won, the first control process (step S3408) of the game section is executed before executing the winning data acquisition process (step S3409). The first control process (step S3408) of the game section in this embodiment will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S3407, or if the process of step S3409 is executed, this means that the determination of the winning combination has ended. In this case, stop information first setting processing for setting stop information for reel stop control is performed (step S3410). After that, in step S3411, an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed, in step S3412, a stop order notification control process is executed, and in step S3413, a game start command transmission process is executed. The processing contents of these steps S3410 to S3413 are the same as steps S709, S710, S712 and S713 of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the first control process of the game section executed in step S3408 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 61).

First, it is determined whether or not the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3501). The second section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is the second section SC2 in the main side MPU 72, and when "1" is set in the second section flag, the second section SC2 , and the first section SC1 is when the value of the second section flag is "0". If the second section flag is set to "1" (step S3501: YES), the processing after step S3502 is not executed. As a result, in the case of the second section SC2, the direct hit lottery process in step S3506 and the lottery process for the number of unlocked games in step S3510 are not executed.

If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S3501: NO), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) (step S3502). ). If the current gaming state is the CB state (step S3502: YES), the processing after step S3503 is not executed. As a result, in the case of the CB state even in the first section SC1, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S3504, the direct hit lottery process in step S3506, and the unlock game number lottery process in step S3510. will not be executed.

If the current gaming state is not the CB state (step S3502: NO), by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3", the bet number of this game is It is determined whether or not it is "3" (step S3503). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S3503: NO), the processing after step S3504 is not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the first section SC1, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S3504, the direct lottery process in step S3506, and the cancellation game in step S3510. The number lottery process will not be executed.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S3503: YES), the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the number of continued games counter 74c and the total winning number counter of the main side RAM 74 are set. 74d are cleared to "0" (step S3504). The second section SC2 is set by setting the second section flag to "1".

After that, it is determined whether or not the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S3505). Here, as already described, in the combination lottery process (FIG. 61), the first control process (step S3408) of the game section is executed before the winning data acquisition process (step S3409) is executed. Therefore, even if the player wins with the index value IV=17 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 61) in the current game, the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data set to the index value IV=17 Since the game section first control process (FIG. 65) is executed before being stored in the main RAM 74, the main RAM 74 does not store the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data. Therefore, even if the player wins with the index value IV=17 in the current game, a negative determination is made in step S3505. On the other hand, if the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 before the current game is started, an affirmative determination is made in step S3505.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3505, direct hit lottery processing is executed (step S3506). In the direct hit lottery process, a direct hit lottery table provided in the main side ROM 73 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the main side RAM 74 are used to determine by lottery whether or not to win a direct hit in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. do. In the lottery process (FIG. 61) for the combination in this game, if the index value IV other than the index value IV=11 to 15 is won, there is a 10% probability that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be won directly, and the index If the value IV=11 is won, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is won directly with a probability of 20%, and if the index value IV=12 is won, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is hit directly with a probability of 15%. If the winning is won and the index value IV=13 is won, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be won directly with a probability of 60%, and if the index value IV=14 is won, the pseudo-bonus will be won with a 30% probability. The state ST4 is directly hit, and if the index value IV=15 is won, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is directly hit with a probability of 20%. In this case, the lower the probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 61), the higher the probability of winning a direct hit in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 61).

If the direct hit lottery process results in a direct hit win in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S3507: YES), the first transition confirmation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3508). As in the first embodiment, the first transition confirmation flag indicates that a direct hit lottery process (step S3506) executed when transitioning to the second section SC2 resulted in a direct hit to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It is a flag for specifying in main side MPU72. When the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1", a process for shifting the game state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed when the current game is over, as in the first embodiment.

After that, lighting processing of the section display section 67 is executed (step S3509). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that it is the second section SC2.

If the direct hit lottery process does not result in a direct hit win in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S3507: NO), a lottery process for the number of unlocked games is executed (step S3510). The number of unlocked games is the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs in the case where the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not won in the transition lottery process (step S2112) in the first embodiment. is a counter for specifying by the main MPU 72 . In the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, first, the lottery table for the number of unlocked games pre-stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 . Then, the number of unlocked games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter against the lottery table of the number of unlocked games. In this case, one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of unlocked games. In addition, the selection probabilities for each number of unlocked games are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the probability of selecting the number of unlocked games with a large number of games is set high, or the probability of selecting the number of unlocked games with a small number of games is set high. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which After executing the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, the number of unlocked games selected in the lottery process for the number of unlocked games is set in the unlocked game number counter 74e provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3511).

After that, similarly to step S1812 in the first control process (FIG. 37) of the game section in the first embodiment, the lighting lottery process for the section display section 67 is executed (step S3512). When immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S3512) of the section display section 67 (step S3513: YES), the lighting process of the section display section 67 is executed (step S3514). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that it is the second section SC2. On the other hand, when lighting standby is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S3512) of the section display unit 67 (step S3513: NO), the lighting standby flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3515). . The lighting standby flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that switching of the section display portion 67 from the off state to the lighting state is waiting in the second section SC2.

Here, the value set in the number-of-released-games counter 74e is decremented by 1 in step S2217 in the normal processing (FIG. 41) as in the first embodiment, and the value of the number-of-released-games counter 74e after the subtraction of 1 is becomes "0" (step S2218: YES), the game state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 by executing the first start setting process (step S2213). In this case, when the value of the canceled game number counter 74e becomes "0", regardless of whether or not either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in that game, The game state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 by executing the first start setting process (step S2213). Also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the transition lottery process (step S2112) is executed in the advantageous lottery process (FIG. 40) at the start of the game in the second section SC2. If the lottery process results in a winning transition, the first start setting process (step S2213) is executed in the normal process (FIG. 41), thereby shifting the game state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

That is, if either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 when newly shifting to the second section SC2, it is determined whether or not to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The direct lottery process (step S3506) for the purpose is not executed. On the other hand, in the situation where the second section SC2 continues, regardless of whether or not either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is entered. process is executed. As a result, either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 with respect to the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the situation where the second section SC2 is newly started. While the condition is imposed, it is possible to avoid imposing such a condition on the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the situation where the second section SC2 continues.

Next, how the transition to the second section SC2 occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 66(a) shows a period during which operating power is supplied to the main MPU 72, FIG. 66(b) shows a period during which a game with a bet number of "3" is being executed, and FIG. 66(c). 66(d) shows the timing at which the lottery for the combination (steps S3401 to S3407) is executed, FIG. Shows the period during which CB winning data (first CB winning data or second CB winning data) is stored in the main RAM 74, FIG. FIG. 66(h) shows the period of the game state ST1, and the period of the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

First, the case where the direct lottery process (step S3506) is executed but the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur will be described.

In the situation where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the slot machine 10 is turned on at the timing t1. Supply of operating power is started. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 66(f) and 66(g), the state is the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

Here, in the first embodiment, when the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10), the first CB winning data is cleared and the second CB winning data is cleared. However, in the present embodiment, both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are cleared when the all clear processing (step S105) is executed. Both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are cleared regardless of which of the clearing processes (step S105) is executed. Therefore, when the set value update process (step S106) is executed, the main side RAM 74 is in a state in which both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are not stored. This time, since the set value update process (step S106) is not executed in the main process (FIG. 10) executed by the start of supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72, the CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. is maintained.

After that, at the timing of t2, a game with a bet number of "3" is started as shown in FIG. 66(b). In this case, the winning lottery (steps S3401 to S3407) is executed at the timing t3 as shown in FIG. 66(c). One of the index values IV is won in the lottery for the winning combination. Therefore, the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game section is executed as shown in FIG. 66(d) at the timing of t4 thereafter. As a result, the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 66(f). In addition, direct hit lottery processing (step S3506) is executed in the first control processing (FIG. 65) of the game section. However, since the direct hit lottery process (step S3506) does not result in a direct hit lottery, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur in this game, and the normal game state ST1 is maintained as shown in FIG. 66(g). be done. Then, at the timing of t5, the current game ends as shown in FIG. 66(b).

Next, the case where the direct lottery process (step S3506) is executed and the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs will be described.

In the situation where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the slot machine 10 is turned on at the timing t6. Supply of operating power is started. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 66(f) and 66(g), the state is the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. In addition, since the set value update process (step S106) is not executed in the main process (FIG. 10) executed by the start of supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 this time, the CB in the main RAM 74 A state in which winning data is stored is maintained.

After that, at timing t7, a game with the number of bets of "3" is started as shown in FIG. 66(b). In this case, the winning lottery (steps S3401 to S3407) is executed at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. 66(c). One of the index values IV is won in the lottery for the winning combination. Therefore, at the timing of t9 after that, the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game section is executed as shown in FIG. 66(d). As a result, the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 66(f). In addition, direct hit lottery processing (step S3506) is executed in the first control processing (FIG. 65) of the game section. Then, in the direct hit lottery process (step S3506), a direct hit is won. Therefore, at the timing t10 when the current game ends, the game state shifts from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 66(g) and 66(h).

Next, the case where the normal game state ST1 is continued without executing the direct hit lottery process (step S3506) will be described.

When the CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, the slot machine 10 is turned on at the timing of t11, and as shown in FIG. Supply of operating power is started. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 66(f) and 66(g), the state is the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

Here, the set value update process (step S106) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10) executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started this time. Therefore, since the partial clearing process (step S104) or the all clearing process (step S105) is executed, the CB winning data in the main side RAM 74 is cleared as shown in FIG. 66(e) at the timing of t12. be. In other words, the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 .

After that, at the timing of t13, a game with a bet number of "3" is started as shown in FIG. 66(b). In this case, the winning lottery (steps S3401 to S3407) is executed at the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 66(c). In the lottery for the combination, the player wins the index value IV=17 in which the 1st CB winning data or the 2nd CB winning data and the 10th compensation winning data are set. Therefore, at the timing of t15 thereafter, the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game section is executed as shown in FIG. 66(d). As a result, the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 66(f).

However, the first control process of the game section (FIG. 65) is executed prior to the winning data acquisition process (step S3409) in the combination lottery process (FIG. 61). Therefore, even if the index value IV=17 is won in the current game, the CB winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 while the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game section is being executed. . Therefore, the direct hit winning process (step S3506) is not executed in the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game section, and the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur in the current game. Therefore, the normal game state ST1 is maintained as shown in FIG. 66(g).

After that, the winning data acquisition process (step S3409) is executed at the timing of t16, which is the timing after the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game section ends, so that as shown in FIG. CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 . Then, at the timing of t17, the current game ends as shown in FIG. 66(b).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Setting of the second section SC2 depending on whether or not CB winning data (first CB winning data or second CB winning data) is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the situation set in the second section SC2 The difference is whether or not the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 can sometimes occur. As a result, the player pays attention not only to the fact that the second section SC2 is set, but also to whether or not the CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM74.

When the supply of operating power is started, the partial clearing process (step S104) or the all clearing process (step S105) is executed so that the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74. On the other hand, even if the second section SC2 ends, the main side RAM 74 will not be in a state where the CB winning data is not stored. As a result, the mode of transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is changed in the second section SC2 that occurs immediately after the supply of the operating power is started and the second section SC2 that occurs again after the second section SC2 has already occurred. It is possible to make a difference.

When partial clear processing (step S104) or all clear processing (step S105) is executed, set value update processing (step S106) is executed. Therefore, immediately after the set value update process (step S106) is executed, the CB winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74, and in this situation, if the second section SC2 is set, the second section A transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur when SC2 is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 from occurring immediately after the setting value updating process (step S106) is illegally executed, for example.

CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 by winning the index value IV=17 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 61). As a result, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the case of being set to the second section SC2 depends on whether or not it is after the index value IV=17 has been won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 61). It is possible to make a difference between the presence or absence of

Even if the index value IV=17 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 61), CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning data acquisition process (step S3409) for the winning of the index value IV=17. is stored, it is determined whether or not the second section SC2 is set in the state where the CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the first control process of the game section (FIG. 65). As a result, in order to determine that the situation set in the second section SC2 is the situation in which the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the It is necessary to win the index value IV=17 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 61).

When the set value update process (step S106) is executed at the start of supply of operating power, the partial clear process (step S104) or the all clear process (step S105) is executed, so that the main side RAM 74 wins the CB. Data is not stored, but in this case, even if you win the index value IV=17 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 61) in the game immediately after the start, the second section SC2 in the game while the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, it is not determined that the second section SC2 has been set. never do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 from occurring immediately after the setting value updating process (step S106) is illegally executed, for example.

In the winning lottery process (FIG. 61), when the index value IV=17 is won, not only the CB winning data but also the 10th complementary winning data are stored in the main RAM 74, and the CB winning (first CB winning or first CB winning). Establishment of the 10th Compensation Prize is prioritized over establishment of the 2CB Prize). As a result, the state in which the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 is maintained until the game after the game in which the index value IV=17 was won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 61). becomes possible.

If the second section SC2 is set in a situation where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may occur when the second section SC2 is set. If the second section SC2 is set in a situation where the CB winning data is not stored, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur when the second section SC2 is set. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the attention of the player to whether or not the CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 .

When the second section SC2 is set in a situation where CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, the direct hit lottery process (step S3506) is executed, and a direct hit win causes a shift to the pseudo bonus state ST4. On the other hand, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur unless a direct hit is won. This makes it possible to create a situation in which transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur even when the second section SC2 is set in the state where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.例文帳に追加Therefore, even if it is confirmed that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has not occurred when the second section SC2 is set, for example, the set value update process (step S106) is executed. It is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not Further, in the case of this configuration, the player expects that the second section SC2 will be set in a situation where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. If it is set to the second section SC2 under the circumstances, it is expected that a direct hit will be won in the direct hit lottery process (step S3506). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the objects that the player pays attention to.

In the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1, the transition lottery process (step S2112) becomes transition winning or the number of remaining unlocked games becomes "0", thereby winning the CB in the main side RAM 74. Regardless of whether or not data is stored, the game state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. As a result, the conditions necessary for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are different between the case where the second section SC2 is newly set and the case where the state of the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1 continues. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to diversify the transition mode of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in relation to the second section SC2.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the transition condition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when transitioning from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of game states and transition modes of the game states in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the first section SC1 and the second section SC2 are set as the game sections, and the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the end preparation state ST5 are set as the game states. is set. Although not shown in FIG. 67, there are also a first CB state ST2 and a second CB state ST3 as game states. In this embodiment, in addition to the game state in the first embodiment, there are a first chance zone state (hereinafter referred to as first CZ state) ST6 and a second chance zone state (hereinafter referred to as second CZ state) ST7. there is

Both the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7 are game states in which the player can stay when the game section is the second section SC2, and are game states in which the player cannot stay when the game section is the first section SC1. In the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7, a transition lottery process (step S3707) during CZ, which will be described later, is executed regardless of the role lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game, and transition winning is a pseudo bonus. A transition to state ST4 will occur. In the normal game state ST1 which is neither the first CZ state ST6 nor the second CZ state ST7, when any of the index values IV = 11 to 15 is won in the combination lottery process (Fig. 16), the transition lottery process for normal (Step S3711) is executed. In this case, the probability of winning the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7 is set higher than the probability of winning the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the normal game state ST1. That is, in the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7, transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is more likely to occur than in the case of the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1.

In each of the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7, the game with the number of bets "3" in the non-CB state ends when 10 games, which is the number of continuous CZ games, are completed. The probability of transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in ST6 or the second CZ state ST7 is 50%. When the first CZ state ST6 ends without transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the normal game state ST1 is entered. That is, when the shift to the first CZ state ST6 occurs, the shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs with a probability of 50%, and the normal game state ST1 returns with a probability of 50%. Further, when the second CZ state ST7 ends without transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the state enters the end preparation state ST5 and then the first section SC1. That is, when the transition to the second CZ state ST7 occurs, there is a 50% probability that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will occur, and the first section SC1 will occur with a 50% probability. The probability of transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the first CZ state ST6 is the same as the probability of transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the second CZ state ST7. Also, as in the first embodiment, a transition from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may occur.

The first CZ state ST6 is surely generated when the game section shifts from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2. That is, when the game section shifts from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2, the first CZ state ST6 is first entered. When the first CZ state ST6 is reached, there is a 50% probability that the normal game state ST1 follows, and a 50% probability that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 follows. The second CZ state ST7 certainly occurs when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2. When the second CZ state ST7 is reached, there is a 50% probability that the first section SC1 will follow, and with a 50% probability that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will follow.

Here, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, the transition to the second CZ state ST7 is made as described above, and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is entered at a probability of 50%. Even if the transition to the first section SC1 occurs via the end preparation state ST5 without the transition of If so, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs with a probability of 50%. In other words, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs in the subsequent second CZ state ST7 with a probability of 50%. Even if the transition to the first section SC1 occurs with a probability of 50%, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs with a probability of 50% in the first CZ state ST6 following the transition to the second section SC2. Therefore, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, there is a 75% probability that the game will shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 again.

On the other hand, when the partial clearing process (step S104) or the all clearing process (step S105) is executed at the start of supply of operating power to the main MPU 72, and the set value update process (step S106) is executed, the first It will start from section SC1. In this case, the transition to the first CZ state ST6 is made along with the transition to the second section SC2, but as already explained, the probability of the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurring in the first CZ state ST6 is 50%. . Further, when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the first section SC1 is entered without going through the second CZ state ST7. In this case, the transition to the first CZ state ST6 is made along with the transition to the second section SC2, but as already explained, the probability of the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurring in the first CZ state ST6 is 50%. .

That is, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is performed again with a probability of 75%. If the set value update process (step S106) is executed at the start of power supply or if the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met, then there is a 50% probability that the state will shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. As a result, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, the operating power to the main side MPU 72 is increased while relatively increasing the probability of re-entering the pseudo-bonus state ST4. When the set value update process (step S106) is executed at the start of supply or when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met, the probability of shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 can be made relatively low.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for enabling the game state transition mode as described above will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the first control process of the game section in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 .

First, it is determined whether or not the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3601). The second section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is the second section SC2 in the main side MPU 72, and when "1" is set in the second section flag, the second section SC2 , and the first section SC1 is when the value of the second section flag is "0". If "1" is set in the second section flag (step S3601: YES), the processing after step S3602 is not executed. As a result, the process for shifting the game state to the first CZ state ST6 in step S3606 is not executed in the case of the second section SC2.

If the second interval flag is not set to "1" (step S3601: NO), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) (step S3602). ). If the current gaming state is the CB state (step S3602: YES), the processing after step S3603 is not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing for setting the second section SC2 in step S3605 and the game state in step S3606 to the first CZ state The processing for shifting to ST6 is not executed.

If the current gaming state is not the CB state (step S3602: NO), by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3", the bet number of this game is It is determined whether or not it is "3" (step S3603). If the number of bets for this game is "2" (step S3603: NO), the processing after step S3604 is not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the first section SC1, the processing for setting the second section SC2 in step S3605 and the game state in step S3606 are shifted to the first CZ state ST6. This means that the process to make it work will not be executed.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S3603: YES), it is determined whether or not any index value IV has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current combination (step S3604). ). If the lottery process (FIG. 16) for this combination is lost (step S3604: NO), the processes after step S3605 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is lost in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S3605 and the game state in step S3606 are changed. The processing for shifting to the first CZ state ST6 is not executed.

In the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current combination, if any index value IV has been won (step S3604: YES), the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the main side RAM 74 The continuous game number counter 74c and the total winning number counter 74d are each cleared to "0" (step S3605). The second section SC2 is set by setting the second section flag to "1".

Thereafter, the first CZ flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the CZ counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "10" (step S3606). The first CZ flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 whether or not the game state is the first CZ state ST6. The CZ counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of remaining CZ continuation games in the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7.

After that, lighting processing of the section display section 67 is executed (step S3607). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that it is the second section SC2. Further, when the transition to the second section SC2 occurs, the transition to the first CZ state ST6 certainly occurs. can be turned on.

After that, the first CZ transition command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3608). The first CZ transition command is a command for making the effect-side MPU 92 recognize that it has transitioned to the first CZ state ST6. When the effect side MPU 92 receives the first CZ transition command, the effect corresponding to the first CZ state ST6 is performed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize whether or not it is the first CZ state ST6. The image display device 63 may be configured to display the number of remaining CZ continuation games in the first CZ state ST6.

FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72 .

First, it is determined whether or not the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3701). As already explained, the second section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is the second section SC2 by the main side MPU 72, and there are cases where "1" is set in the second section flag. The second section SC2 is the first section SC1 when the value of the second section flag is "0". If the second interval flag is not set to "1" (step S3701: NO), the processing after step S3702 is not executed. As a result, when it is the first section SC1, the processing for shifting the game state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 after step S3706 is not executed.

If the second interval flag is set to "1" (step S3701: YES), and if the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S3702: YES), the pseudo-bonus processing at the start of the game is executed. (step S3703). The processing contents of the pseudo-bonus processing at the start of the game are the same as those of the first embodiment.

When the second section flag is set to "1" (step S3701: YES) and the gaming state is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S3702: NO), the current gaming state is the CB state (the 1CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) is determined (step S3704). If the current gaming state is the CB state (step S3704: YES), the processing after step S3705 is not executed. As a result, even if the second section SC2 is in the CB state, the processing for shifting the gaming state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 after step S3706 is not executed.

If the current gaming state is not the CB state (step S3704: NO), by determining whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3", the bet number of this game is It is determined whether or not it is "3" (step S3705). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S3705: NO), the processes after step S3706 are not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the second section SC2, the processing for shifting the gaming state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 after step S3706 is not executed.

If the number of bets for this game is "3" (step S3705: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the first CZ flag or the second CZ flag of the main RAM 74. , it is determined whether the gaming state is either the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7 (step S3706). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3706, a transition lottery process during CZ is executed (step S3707). In the shift lottery process during CZ, a lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to generate a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 with a winning probability corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game. In this case, the more the winning index value IV with the lower winning probability is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the higher the probability of winning the transition lottery in the transition lottery process during CZ. In addition, although the probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process during CZ is arbitrary, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is entered before 10 games, which is the number of continuous CZ games, are completed in the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7. The probability of winning the transfer is 50%.

If the transition is won (step S3708: YES), the transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3709). The transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify that the game state is to be shifted to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when the current game ends.

On the other hand, if both the first CZ flag and the second CZ flag of the main RAM 74 are not set to "1" (step S3706: NO), the index value IV= On the condition that any one of 11 to 15 is won (step S3710: YES), normal transfer lottery processing is executed (step S3711). The contents of the transition lottery process for normal use are the same as the transition lottery process of step S2112 in the advantageous lottery process (FIG. 40) at the start of the game in the first embodiment. If the transfer is won (step S3712: YES), the transfer determination flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3713). As already explained, the transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify that the game state is to be shifted to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when the current game ends.

FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing normal processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 .

When "1" is set to the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S3801: YES), "1" is set to the transition determination flag of the main side RAM 74. (step S3802). At the start of the game this time, if the transition lottery process during CZ (step S3707) or normal transition lottery process (step S3711) is successful, the transition determination flag is set to "1". .

If the transition determination flag is set to "1" (step S3802: YES), start setting processing is executed (step S3803). In the start setting process, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is set to a value corresponding to 40 games, which is the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. do. The pseudo-bonus state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It is a counter for specifying in .

After that, a start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3804). The start command is a command indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has newly started. Further, the start command includes information indicating that the current initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 40 games. When the start command is received, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, on the image display device 63, a moving image corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is displayed, and a display indicating the number of remaining games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the number of game media obtained in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are displayed. is displayed.

When "1" is not set to the transition confirmation flag (step S3802: NO), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) (step S3805). . If the current gaming state is the CB state (step S3805: YES), the processing after step S3806 is not executed. In the processing after step S3806, when the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7 is reached, the remaining CZ continuous game number is subtracted by 1 as one game is completed, and the remaining CZ continuous game number is 0”, a process for terminating the current CZ state out of the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7 is executed. Further, when one game is completed, the number of games necessary for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is subtracted by 1, and when the condition for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is satisfied as the game is completed, the relevant A process for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed. In this case, if it is in the CB state, by not executing the processing after step S3806, even if the game is completed in the CB state, it is a factor that brings the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7 closer to the end. In addition, it is possible to prevent the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 from becoming a factor.

If the current gaming state is not the CB state (step S3805: NO), by determining whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3", the bet number of this game is It is determined whether or not it is "3" (step S3806). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S3806: NO), the processes after step S3807 are not executed. As a result, when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, the processes after step S3807 are not executed. It is possible not to cause the state ST6 or the end of the second CZ state ST7 to become a factor, and to prevent the shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 from becoming a factor.

If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S3806: YES), the first CZ state ST6 is reached by determining whether or not the first CZ flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not (step S3807). If the first CZ flag is set to "1" (step S3807: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the CZ counter in the main RAM 74 (step S3808). If the value of the CZ counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3809: YES), the first CZ flag is cleared to "0" (step S3810).

Thereafter, lottery processing for the number of unlocked games is executed (step S3811). The number of unlocked games is the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs in the case where the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not won in the normal transition lottery process (step S3711). It is a counter for specifying in . In the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, first, the lottery table for the number of unlocked games pre-stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 . Then, the number of unlocked games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter against the lottery table of the number of unlocked games. In this case, one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of unlocked games. In addition, the selection probabilities for each number of unlocked games are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the probability of selecting the number of unlocked games with a large number of games is set high, or the probability of selecting the number of unlocked games with a small number of games is set high. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which After executing the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, the number of unlocked games selected in the lottery process for the number of unlocked games is set in the unlocked game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S3812). The unlocked game number counter 74e is a counter for specifying the number of remaining unlocked games in the main MPU 72 .

If the first CZ flag is not set to "1" (step S3807: NO), the second CZ state ST7 is established by determining whether or not the second CZ flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not (step S3813). If the second CZ flag is set to "1" (step S3813: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the CZ counter in the main RAM 74 (step S3814). If the value of the CZ counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3815: YES), the second CZ flag is cleared to "0" (step S3816).

After that, the process of setting the termination preparation state ST5 is executed (step S3817). In the setting process, the termination preparation state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the end preparation state ST5 is set, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST5. Thereafter, the termination preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3818). The termination preparation completion flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the termination preparation state ST5.

In the end preparation state ST5, as in the first embodiment, the affirmative determination is made in step S1902 in the second control process (FIG. 38) of the game section, and the end preparation completion flag is not set to "1". If so (step S1903: NO), after setting the end preparation completion flag to "1", a process for specifying whether or not the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is executed, and the game section in the current game The second control process (FIG. 38) ends. On the other hand, if the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S1903: YES), processing for ending the second section SC2 and shifting to the first section SC1 is executed (steps S1914 to S1916). ). As a result, the second section SC2 ends. It should be noted that if the end preparation state ST5 is not set and the second CZ state ST7 ends, the second section SC2 may be ended in the game.

If the second CZ flag is not set to "1" (step S3813: NO), 1 is subtracted from the value of the canceled game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S3819). Then, if the value of the unlocked game number counter 74e after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3820: YES), the start setting process is executed (step S3821), and a start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 ( step S3822). The processing contents of these steps S3821 and S3822 are the same as those of steps S3803 and S3804.

FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing the pseudo-bonus processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 .

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" (step S3901). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S3901: NO), the processes after step S3902 are not executed. As a result, even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not subtracted, and the addition period in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. remaining number of continuous games is not subtracted.

In the case of the CB state (the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3), the pseudo-bonus processing (FIG. 49) itself is not executed. The number of games played in the state is not treated as the number of games played in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, even if the transition to the CB state occurs in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is restarted from the state of the remaining number of continuous games immediately before the transition to the CB state after the CB state ends. .

If the number of bets for the current number of games is "3" (step S3901: YES), other processing is executed (step S3902). In other processes, the same processes as those of steps S2703 to S2708 of the pseudo-bonus process (FIG. 49) in the first embodiment are executed.

After that, 1 is subtracted from the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 (step S3903). Then, if the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3904: YES), the pseudo-bonus status flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3905). As a result, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends. After that, the second CZ flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the CZ counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "10" (step S3906). The second CZ flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 whether or not the game state is the second CZ state ST7. The CZ counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of remaining CZ continuation games in the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7.

Thereafter, a command to end the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S3907). The end command of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a command for making the effect-side MPU 92 recognize that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended and the state has shifted to the second CZ state ST7. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the end command of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the effect corresponding to the second CZ state ST7 is executed after the effect indicating the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed. , upper lamp 61 , speaker 62 and image display device 63 . This allows the player to clearly recognize that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended, and enables the player to clearly recognize whether or not it is the second CZ state ST7. The image display device 63 may be configured to display the number of remaining CZ continuation games in the second CZ state ST7.

Next, the game state transition mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 72(a) shows the situation of the first section SC1, FIG. 72(b) shows the situation of the second section SC2, and FIG. 72(c) shows the period of the first CZ state ST6. (d) shows the period of the normal game state ST1, FIG. 72(e) shows the period of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and FIG. 72(f) shows the period of the second CZ state ST7.

At the timing of t1, which is the situation of the first section SC1, the game section shifts from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 as shown in FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b). In this case, the first CZ state ST6 is entered at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 72(c). The transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur in the first CZ state ST6. Therefore, at the timing t2 when the first CZ state ST6 ends, the normal game state ST1 is entered as shown in FIG. 72(d). After that, by winning the transition in the normal transition lottery process (step S3711) executed in the normal game state ST1 or the number of remaining unlocked games becomes "0", at the timing of t3 in FIG. 72 ( d) and as shown in FIG. 72(e), the game state shifts from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

After that, at the timing of t4, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends as shown in FIG. 72(e). In this case, the ending condition of the second section SC2 is not satisfied. Therefore, at the timing t4, the game state becomes the second CZ state ST7 as shown in FIG. 72(f). In the transition lottery process (step S3707) during CZ executed in the second CZ state ST7, the transition lottery is won. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the game state returns from the second CZ state ST7 to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 72(e) and 72(f).

After that, at the timing of t6, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends as shown in FIG. 72(e). In this case, the ending condition of the second section SC2 is not satisfied. Therefore, at the timing of t6, the game state becomes the second CZ state ST7 as shown in FIG. 72(f). The transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur in the second CZ state ST7. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the second CZ state ST7 ends as shown in FIG. 72(f), and the game section changes from the second section SC2 to the first section as shown in FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b). Move to SC1. Incidentally, in practice, the second CZ state ST7 ends and before the first section SC1 ends, the state shifts to the end preparation state ST5.

After that, at the timing of t8, the game section shifts from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 as shown in FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b). In this case, the first CZ state ST6 is entered at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. 72(c). In the CZ transition lottery process (step S3707) executed in the first CZ state ST6, the transition lottery is won. Therefore, at the timing of t9, the game state shifts from the first CZ state ST6 to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 72(c) and 72(e).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the game enters the second CZ state ST7 in which transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is more likely than in the normal game state ST1. As a result, even if the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the player can expect the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 again.

When the second CZ state ST7 ends without transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the second section SC2 also ends. As a result, when the second CZ state ST7 ends without transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the second section SC2 does not continue in a state in which the degree of expectation for the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is low. It becomes possible to

When the second section SC2 is newly set, the state becomes the first CZ state ST6 in which transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is more likely to occur than the normal game state ST1. This makes it possible to heighten the player's expectations for the new setting of the second section SC2.

In particular, in the configuration in which the second CZ state ST7 is established after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, the configuration in which the first CZ state ST6 is entered when the second section SC2 is newly set makes it possible for the second CZ state ST6 to occur after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends. It is possible to increase the probability of returning to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Further, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, both the second CZ state ST7 and the first CZ state ST6 are sequentially generated. In this case, only the first CZ state ST6 will occur. Therefore, the probability of returning to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends can be increased without setting the probability of transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 immediately after the start of supply of operating power so high.

When the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur in the first CZ state ST6, the normal game state ST1 is entered in the second section SC2. As a result, even if the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur in the first CZ state ST6, the second section SC2 can be continued.

In the first section SC1, the winning combination is set to the second section SC2 by winning any combination in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16). This makes it possible to cause the transition from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 to occur early. Further, even if the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur in the second CZ state ST7 that occurs after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the second section SC2 ends with the end of the second CZ state ST7. When the first section SC1 is entered and one of the winning combinations is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first section SC1, the second section SC2 is newly set and the first CZ state ST6 is entered. Therefore, not only is the probability of re-shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 after the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 increased, but also the number of games required to transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 again can be reduced.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 includes a first pseudo-bonus state in which the number of initial continuous games is relatively large and a second pseudo-bonus state in which the number of initial continuous games is relatively small. Specifically, the initial number of continuous games is 100 in the first pseudo-bonus state, and the initial number of continuous games is 50 in the second pseudo-bonus state.

In the configuration in which the first pseudo-bonus state and the second pseudo-bonus state exist as described above, in the present embodiment, when a special bell win is established on the main line ML, the transition to the first pseudo-bonus state is performed. If it is the corresponding transition standby period, after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started at the start of the game after that, it corresponds to the first pseudo bonus state in the invalid period of the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the combination of symbols is stop-displayed and it is the transition standby period corresponding to the transition to the second pseudo-bonus state, the stop button is pressed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating at the start of the subsequent game. The combination of symbols corresponding to the second pseudo-bonus state is stopped and displayed during the invalid period of the operations of 42-44. After the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is restarted, and then the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 becomes effective, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. Based on this, the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is executed in a manner corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

FIGS. 73(a) to 73(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the operations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as described above.

When the index value IV=10 is won in the state of the normal game state ST1 and the transition waiting period, the right reel 32R is first stopped, and "white 7" symbols and "white 7" are displayed on the main line ML. A special bell win is established on the main line ML as shown in FIG. After that, when a new game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are started to rotate, and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are started during the invalid period of the operation of the stop buttons 42-44. rotation is stopped.

If this time is the transition waiting period corresponding to the transition to the first pseudo-bonus state, as shown in FIG. , a "red 7" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L, a "red 7" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol is stopped on the right reel 32R. As a result, the player is notified that the transition to the first pseudo-bonus state will occur. After that, regardless of whether the start lever 41 is operated or not, the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is restarted. Based on this, the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is executed in a mode corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

If this time is the transition waiting period corresponding to the transition to the second pseudo-bonus state, a combination of symbols corresponding to the second pseudo-bonus state is displayed on the main line ML as shown in FIG. , "BAR" symbols are stopped on the left reel 32L, "BAR" symbols are stopped on the middle reel 32M, and "BAR" symbols are stopped on the right reel 32R. As a result, the player is informed that the transition to the second pseudo-bonus state will occur. After that, regardless of whether the start lever 41 is operated or not, the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is restarted. Based on this, the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is executed in a mode corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

According to the above configuration, when a special bell prize is established during the transition standby period, the combination of symbols corresponding to the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 that will occur after the current transition standby period is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the establishment of the special bell prize.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of each embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. In addition, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following other forms may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, if any winning combination is won in the winning lottery process in the first section SC1, the transition to the second section SC2 is ensured. Instead, for example, if any winning combination is won in the winning lottery process in the first section SC1, a section transition lottery process is executed to determine by lottery whether or not to move to the second section SC2. A configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the second section SC2 is performed when the transition is won in the lottery process. Further, in the first section SC1, when a predetermined combination determined as a part of the combination is won in the winning lottery process, it may be configured to shift to the second section SC2, and when the predetermined combination is won, A section shift lottery process for determining whether or not to shift to the second section SC2 by lottery may be executed, and when the transition lottery process wins the transition lottery process, the transition to the second section SC2 may be made. The predetermined combination may be a combination whose winning probability varies according to a set value, or may be a combination whose winning probability does not vary according to a set value. In addition, in the first section SC1, section transition lottery processing is executed to determine by lottery whether or not to shift to the second section SC2 in each game regardless of the result of the winning lottery process. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the transition to the second section SC2 is performed when the transition is won in .

(2) In the first embodiment and the like, in the case of the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1, the shift lottery process (step S2112) is executed regardless of the result of the lottery process of the combination in each game. It may be configured to be In this case, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs regardless of the result of the winning lottery process.

(3) In the above-described first embodiment, etc., the number of unlocked games is set as the maximum number of games required to determine the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when the second section SC2 is in the normal game state ST1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the number of games to be unlocked is not set is also possible.

(4) In the above-described first embodiment and the like, when the addition period continues after the presentation side addition period ends, even if the number of games is increased in the games during this continuing addition period, Although the configuration is such that the added number of games is not reported, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be employed in which the notification is executed when the added number of games is triggered. For example, when a game in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) or a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the additional period of the production side and in the additional period, the additional period is executed. Although the progress is stopped, it is notified that the minimum number of games among the number of games to be added selected in the second addition lottery process (step S2614) has been awarded, but the addition period on the effect side ends. After that, in the second addition lottery process (step S2614) executed in a situation where the addition period continues, if the number of games to be added is greater than the minimum number of games is selected, the selected addition is selected. A configuration may be adopted in which it is notified that the number of games that is the difference between the number of games to be played and the minimum number of games has been awarded. In this case, it is possible to accurately notify the number of additional games actually given to the player.

(5) In the above-described first embodiment, if a game in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) or a game with a bet number of "2" is executed during the additional period, the While the progress is stopped, the progress of the additional period on the production side is continued, but it is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which the progress is stopped and the progress of the performance-side additional period is also stopped. In this case, as a configuration for stopping the progress of the effect-side additional period, the moving image display of the effect-side additional period being executed in the image display device 63 is temporarily stopped with the display content immediately before the start of the non-target game, and then When the target game, which is a game in which the number of bets is "3" in a non-CB state, is executed, the temporarily stopped state is released, and the moving image display of the effect side addition period is temporarily stopped. A resumed configuration is conceivable. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the non-target game was executed during the additional period. Further, in a state in which the moving image display of the effect-side additional period is temporarily stopped as described above, a configuration may be adopted in which a character image or the like is displayed to clearly indicate that the non-target game is being executed. In addition, in the state where the animation display of the effect side addition period is temporarily stopped as described above, the light emission effect in the upper lamp 61 and the sound output effect in the speaker 62 may be temporarily stopped, and these effects are temporarily stopped. A configuration may be adopted in which the non-target game is continued as it is, or a configuration may be adopted in which an effect corresponding to the non-target game is executed.

(6) In the above-described first embodiment, if a game in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) or a game with a bet number of "2" is executed during the additional period, Although the progress is stopped, the present invention is not limited to this. When the game in the CB state is executed, the progress of the extra period is stopped, while the game in which the number of bets is "2" is played. When the game is executed, the progress of the additional period may not be stopped, and when the game with the number of bets "2" is executed, the progress of the additional period is stopped, while the game in the CB state is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the progress of the additional period is not stopped when the additional period is set.

(7) In the first embodiment and the like, when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the first section SC1, the game does not shift to the second section SC2. , but is not limited to this, and even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the first section SC1, the transition to the second section SC2 occurs in the game, or a predetermined A configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the second section SC2 occurs with probability. Further, when this configuration is applied to the third embodiment, the pseudo bonus is determined depending on whether the number of bets in the game following the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 occurs is "2" or "3". Instead of the configuration in which the transition to the state ST4 occurs, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs depending on whether the number of bets in the game shifted to the second section SC2 is "2" or "3". It is good also as a structure which carries out. Specifically, if the number of bets in the game shifted to the second section SC2 is "3", the game shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the number of bets in the game shifted to the second section SC2 is "3". If the value is "2", the game may be configured such that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur. This makes it possible to increase the importance of playing a game with a bet number of "3".

(8) In the above-described third embodiment, when the number of bets in the game subsequent to the game shifted to the second section SC2 is "3", the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 certainly occurs, and the second section SC2 occurs. When the bet number in the game next to the game shifted to SC2 is "2", the normal game state ST1 is surely continued, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the number of bets in the game next to the game shifted to the second section SC2 is "3", the direct hit lottery process is executed, and when the direct hit lottery process wins a direct hit, the process goes to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a transition occurs. In addition, the direct hit lottery process is executed and the direct hit lottery process is performed regardless of whether the number of bets in the game next to the game shifted to the second section SC2 is "3" or "2". When winning, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs, and the number of bets in the game following the game transitioned to the second section SC2 is "3", which is "2". A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of direct hit winning in the direct hit lottery process is higher than in the case of .

(9) In the second section SC2, which is the first transition after the partial clearing process (step S104) or the all clearing process (step S105) is executed in the third embodiment, the game transitioned to the second section SC2. If the number of bets in the next game is "3", the state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and if it is "2", the normal game state ST1 is continued. In the second section SC2 that transitions after the end of the second section SC2, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may occur regardless of the number of bets in the game following the game that transitioned to the second section SC2. As a result, in the second section SC2 that occurs first after the partial clear processing (step S104) or the full clear processing (step S105) is executed, and the second section SC2 that occurs after the second section SC2, It is possible to make the mode of transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 different.

As a specific configuration for realizing the above configuration, for example, when the partial clear processing (step S104) or the full clear processing (step S105) is executed, the post-clear flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". On the other hand, when the second section SC2 ends, the post-clear flag is cleared to "0". When the transition to the second section SC2 occurs and the post-clear flag is set to "1", the number of bets in the game following the game that transitioned to the second section SC2 is "3". If there is, it shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and if it is "2", the normal game state ST1 is continued. If not, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs regardless of the number of bets in the game following the game that transitioned to the second section SC2. As a result, the above-described excellent effects can be obtained with a relatively simple processing configuration.

(10) In the first embodiment and the like, the period in which the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1" and the value of the transition standby counter is 1 or more and the first to third transition confirmation flags In a transition standby period in which "1" is not set in any of the cases and the value of the number-of-released-games counter 74e is 5 or less, a special bell winning has not been established in the transition standby period. When the final game of the period is reached, an effect is executed indicating that the shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed at the time when the lottery process for the winning combination in the final game does not win with the index value IV=10. It may be configured to be As a result, it is possible to start the fixed effect at the time of non-winning at an early timing in the final game of the transition waiting period.

(11) In the third embodiment, when the number of bets in the game following the game that transitioned to the second section SC2 is "2", the state of the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2 continues. At the same time, when the number of remaining games to be unlocked becomes "0" in this situation, or when the unlock lottery process (step S3218) results in winning, the second section SC2 ends and shifts to the first section SC1. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the number of bets in the game next to the game that transitioned to the second section SC2 is "2", and the state of the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1 continues, the situation If the number of remaining unlocked games becomes "0" in step S3218, or if the unlocked lottery process (step S3218) is won, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may occur. In addition, in the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1 generated by the termination of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2 in the configuration, the number of remaining unlocked games becomes "0". In this case, the second section SC2 may end and shift to the first section SC1 when the winning is canceled in the cancellation lottery process (step S3218). As a result, it is possible to change the game state after the end of the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2 according to the content of the trigger for the occurrence of the situation.

(12) In the fourth embodiment, when any of the CB winning data (the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data) is stored in the main side RAM 74 and the setting is made in the second section SC2 Although the configuration is such that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 can sometimes occur, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a specific flag is provided in the main RAM 74, and CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and the CB winning data is not established in the game, the game is terminated. , the specific flag is set to "1". In addition, when the second section SC2 is set in a situation where the specific flag is set to "1", the game set in the second section SC2 may shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, When the specific flag is set to the second section SC2 in a situation where "1" is not set, the game set to the second section SC2 does not shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

With this configuration, the specific flag is set to "1" at the end of the game in which the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. Therefore, in the game in which the CB winning data is stored, the first control process of the game section is executed. After being executed, the specific flag is set to "1". Therefore, even if the second section SC2 is set by winning the index value IV=17 in the lottery process for the game combination executed in the first section SC1, the first control process of the game section in the game is performed. Since the specific flag has not yet been set to "1" at the timing of execution, the game set in the second section SC2 does not transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, not only the CB winning data but also the 10th supplementary winning data is set to the index value IV=17, and establishment of the 10th compensation winning prize is prioritized over establishment of the CB prize, A CB win will not be established in a game in which the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and the specific flag will be set to "1" without fail in the game.

In the situation where the specific flag is set to "1" in the above configuration, when CB winning is established, when partial clear processing (step S104) is executed, or when all clear processing (step S105) is executed In some cases, the specific flag may be cleared to "0". As a result, when the specific flag is set to "1", the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. Therefore, the second interval is set in the state where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. By setting SC2, the game can be shifted to the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

In the above configuration, when the specific flag is set to "1", for example, the probability of winning a replay role and the probability of winning a replay prize are higher than when the specific flag is not set to "1". may be As a result, the main MPU 72 utilizes a flag for identifying the game state in which the odds of winning a replay combination and the probability of winning a replay prize are high, and the above-described excellent effects are achieved. becomes possible.

(13) In the second section SC2, which occurs when the CB winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 in the fourth embodiment, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur. Similarly to the form, in the situation where the second section SC2 is in the normal game state ST1, when the number of remaining unlocked games becomes "0" or when the unlock lottery process is canceled, the second section A configuration may be adopted in which SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1.

(14) In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the second section SC2 is set in a situation where the CB winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74, transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur at the time of setting. In the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1, when the number of remaining unlocked games is "0" or when transition winning is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112), the CB winning data is The configuration is such that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs irrespective of whether or not it is stored in the main RAM 74, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1, if the number of remaining unlocked games becomes "0" or if the transition lottery process (step S2112) results in a transition win, the main RAM 74 When the CB winning data is stored in the RAM 74, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs, but when the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur. may be

(15) In the fourth embodiment, when the CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 and the second section SC2 is set, the direct hit lottery process is executed, and the direct hit lottery is determined in the direct hit lottery process. However, it is not limited to this, and when the CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 and the second section SC2 is set. A configuration may be adopted in which transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 certainly occurs.

(16) In the above-described fourth embodiment, even if the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 and the second section SC2 is set, the direct lottery process is executed and the direct lottery process results in a direct hit. A configuration may be adopted in which a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs due to winning. In this case, when the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 and the second section SC2 is set, the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 and the second section SC2 is set. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of direct hit winning in the direct hit lottery process is lower than in the case of the direct hit lottery process.

(17) In the above-described fourth embodiment, even if the index value IV=17 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 61) for the combination in the case of the first section SC1, the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur. good too. As a result, in order for the CB winning data to be stored in the main RAM 74 when the shift to the second section SC2 occurs, the game prior to the game in which the shift to the second section SC2 occurs It is necessary to win the index value IV=17 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 61).

(18) In the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the main RAM 74 is provided with an ending flag. When the ending flag is set to "1", the pseudo bonus state ST4 is entered. A configuration may be adopted in which even if the operation ends, the transition to the end preparation state ST5 is made without transitioning to the second CZ state ST7.

(19) In the fifth embodiment, if the number of bets in the game next to the game set in the second interval SC2 is "3", a transition to the first CZ state ST6 occurs, and the number of bets is "2". , the normal game state ST1 may be maintained without transition to the first CZ state ST6. Further, when the CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 and the second section SC2 is set, a shift to the first CZ state ST6 occurs, and the CB winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74. When the second section SC2 is set under certain circumstances, the normal game state ST1 may be maintained without shifting to the first CZ state ST6.

(20) In the fifth embodiment, the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7 have the same transition probability to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7 may have substantially the same probability of transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, although they are slightly different. Further, the first CZ state ST6 may be configured to have a higher probability of transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 than the second CZ state ST7, and the second CZ state ST7 may transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 more than the first CZ state ST6. It is good also as a structure with a high probability.

(21) In the first to fifth embodiments, a plurality of pseudo bonus states ST4 may be set. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of pseudo-bonus states ST4 with different numbers of initial continuous games are set. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the transition condition is satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the game state may be shifted to a game state advantageous to the player after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends. The advantageous game states include an AT state, an ART state, an RT state, and the like.

(22) In the above-described first embodiment, etc., the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the first standard number of games, which is the number of games less than the upper limit number of games, or the total net increase in number of game media with restrictions. is equal to or greater than the first reference acquisition number, which is a number smaller than the upper limit net increase number, the ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" so that the number of subsequent games is not added. However, the number of games is not limited to this, and the number of games may be increased even when the ending flag is set to "1". In this case, regardless of whether the ending flag is set to "1" or not set to "1", the probability of occurrence of the additional number of games and the expected value of the number of additional games are the same or substantially the same. It is good also as a structure which is. In addition, in the situation where the ending flag is set to "1", the probability of occurrence of the number of games added and the expected value of the number of games to be added are lower than in the situation where the ending flag is not set to "1". good too.

(23) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is terminated when the remaining number of continuous games becomes "0", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may end when the net increase in the number of game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 reaches the end reference number. In this case, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started, the initial end reference number of sheets is set, and when the additional condition is satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remainder for satisfying the end condition of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. net increase in the number of Further, for example, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may end when the total number of first bell winnings or second bell winnings in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 reaches the end reference number of times. In this case, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started, the initial end reference number of times is set, and when the additional condition is satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remainder for satisfying the end condition of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The total number of establishments of is added.

(24) Although the first predetermined number is "3" and the second predetermined number is "2", specific values of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number are arbitrary. Further, the first predetermined number is not limited to a number larger than the second predetermined number, and the first predetermined number may be a number smaller than the second predetermined number.

(25) Although the first CB state ST2 is a game state in which the game media owned by the player is reduced, it may be a game state in which the game media owned by the player are not increased or decreased. The number of game media to be played may be increased, but the number of increased game media may be very small, such as one or two.

In addition, in the game executed in the first CB state ST2, the number of game media provided in the game is larger than the bet number (specifically, "3") set to start the game. However, due to the low probability of winning a combination that allows the awarding of the game media, in the first CB state ST2 as a whole, the game media owned by the player are not increased or decreased, or the game media owned by the player are reduced. It is good also as a structure which will decrease.

(26) The second CB state ST3 is configured to be a game state in which the game media owned by the player is reduced, but it may be configured to be a game state in which the game media owned by the player are not increased or decreased. The number of game media to be played may be increased, but the number of increased game media may be very small, such as one or two. It is good also as a structure which is.

In addition, in the game executed in the second CB state ST3, the number of game media provided in the game is larger than the bet number (specifically, "2") set to start the game. However, due to the low probability of winning a combination that allows the provision of the game media, the second CB state ST3 as a whole does not increase or decrease the game media owned by the player, or increases or decreases the game media owned by the player. It is good also as a structure which will decrease.

(27) When the CB states ST2 and ST3 are entered in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is temporarily interrupted, and the number of games executed in the CB states ST2 and ST3 is continued for the remainder of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Although it is configured so as not to be subtracted from the number of games, it is not limited to this, and when the CB states ST2 and ST3 occur in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the number of games executed in the CB states ST2 and ST3 is reduced. It may be configured such that it is subtracted from the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to increase the disadvantage of shifting to the CB states ST2 and ST3 in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

(28) A configuration may be adopted in which the winning state of at least one of the first CB and second CB hands is notified while the set value update process (step S106) is being performed. For example, when the set value update process (step S106) is executed in a situation where the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74, the image display device 63 notifies that the second CB winning combination has not been won. It may be configured to be executed. By configuring the notification to end when the set value update process (step S106) ends, the period during which the set value update process (step S106) is executed is limited to the period during which the set value update process (step S106) is executed. It becomes possible to Further, for example, when the set value update process (step S106) is executed in a situation where the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the image display device 63 indicates that the first CB winning has been won. It is good also as a structure by which alerting|reporting is performed. By configuring the notification to end when the set value update process (step S106) ends, the period during which the set value update process (step S106) is executed is limited to the period during which the set value update process (step S106) is executed. It becomes possible to

(29) In a situation where the second CB combination has not been won, the image display device 63 may display a procedure for making the second CB combination won. In this case, if neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won, the second CB role is won by executing a game in which the number of bets is "2", and the second CB role is won in the winning game. It is notified that a game with a bet number of "3" should be executed after that without establishing a prize. In addition, when the first CB role is won, the first CB prize is established by executing the game with the number of bets of "3", and the state is shifted to the first CB state ST2, and the first CB state ST2 is extinguished. You will be notified of what to do. Then, when the first CB state ST2 is completed, a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed to win the second CB role, and the second CB prize is not established in the winning game. Furthermore, after that, it is notified that a game with a bet number of "3" should be executed. As a result, it is possible to prompt a situation in which the second CB combination is won.

(30) In a situation where the 2nd CB role is not won, if the 2nd CB role is won and the 2nd CB prize is not established, a notification indicating that the 2nd CB role has been won is executed. may be As the notification, for example, a notification sound such as “Complete” may be output from the speaker 62 .

(31) If a game with a bet number of “2” is executed in a situation where the second CB combination is won, the image display device 63 may be configured to make a corresponding notification. For example, as the notification, the display image of the image display device 63 may be displayed darker than before. Further, when a game with the number of bets of “2” is executed in a situation where the first CB combination is won, the image display device 63 may execute a notification corresponding to the game. For example, as the notification, the display image of the image display device 63 may be displayed darker than before.

(32) When the number of bets becomes "2" in a situation where the second CB combination is won, the operation of the start lever 41 may be invalidated after that. The invalid period is arbitrary, but may be 10 seconds, for example. In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a game in which the number of bets is “2” is executed even though the second CB combination has already been won. In addition, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the speaker 62 or the image display device 63 announces that the second CB combination has already been won during the invalid period, and the announcement is made when the start lever 41 is operated during the invalid period. It may be configured to be executed triggered by the event.

(33) When the game starts in the first section SC1, it is determined to shift to the second section SC2 at the start of the game, and the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the start of the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined to shift to the second section SC2 at the start of the game, and transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the end of the game. Further, it may be configured such that the transition to the second section SC2 is determined at the end of the game and the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the end of the game. In this case, it is possible to increase the number of games played in the first section SC1.

(34) A transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may occur when a game with a bet number of "3" is played, while a pseudo-bonus state may occur when a game with a bet number of "2" is played. Although the configuration is such that transition to state ST4 does not occur, the present invention is not limited to this, and transition to pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs even when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed. It is good also as a structure which obtains. In this case, the probability of transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is the same or substantially the same between when a game with a bet number of "3" is played and when a game with a bet number of "2" is played. It is good also as a structure which is. In addition, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, the probability of transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is higher than when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed. may be configured. In addition, the probability of transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is higher when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed than when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed. may be configured.

(35) It may be possible to check the currently set setting value by executing the setting confirmation process based on the setting confirmation operation performed by the administrator of the gaming hall. . For example, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on while the main MPU 72 is being supplied with operating power, the setting confirmation process is executed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the currently set value is displayed on the combined display section 66 . In this configuration, the partial clearing process (step S104) may be performed when the setting confirmation process is performed. When the partial clearing process is executed, the first CB winning data is erased, but the second CB winning data and the information of the set value are not erased. As a result, it is possible to check the set value currently set while preventing the second CB winning data from being erased.

(36) In the partial clearing process (step S104), what is excluded from the information to be erased is not limited to only the second CB winning data, and the intrusion abnormality flag of the main side RAM 74 may also be excluded. . As a result, even if the power is once turned off after the intrusion abnormality notification is started, and the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed when the power is turned on after that, the intrusion abnormality notification is resumed. Become. In this case, in order to prevent the intrusion abnormality notification from being restarted, it is necessary to perform the all clear processing (step S105). Data will be erased.

(37) If the intrusion abnormality flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", then the progress of the game may be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued even though the intrusion abnormality has occurred.

(38) A configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the second section SC2 can occur under the condition that the second CB role is won, and a pseudo condition is that the second CB role is won. A configuration in which a transition to the bonus state ST4 may occur may be employed. In this case, it is possible to increase the importance of winning the second CB combination.

Further, in the situation where the first CB role is won, the transition to the second section SC2 may not occur, and in the situation where the first CB role is won, even the second section SC2 is in a pseudo bonus state. A configuration in which transition to ST4 does not occur may be adopted. In this case, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of winning the first CB combination.

(39) Although it is configured that a period in which the section display unit 67 is in the off state can occur even in the second section SC2, the present invention is not limited to this. The section display section 67 may be configured to be in a lighting state.

(40) An advantageous display section is provided separately from the section display section 67, and the section display section 67 is always lit in the second section SC2, and the section display section 67 is always lit in the first section SC1. is turned off, the advantageous display portion is always turned on when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is present, and the advantageous display portion is always turned off when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not set.

(41) The number of games in which the end preparation state ST5 continues is not limited to one game, and may be two games, three games, or four games or more. Further, there may be a plurality of types of continuous game numbers of the end preparation state ST5, and the end preparation state ST5 may be maintained over the number of continuous games selected by lottery from the plurality of types of continuous game numbers.

(42) In the second control process of the game section (FIG. 38), when a replay win is established, the updating process (steps S1908 to S1912) of the total winning number counter 74d of the main side RAM 74 is not executed. , the update process may be executed. In this case, when a replay win is established, the number of bets for the current game is subtracted from the total winning number counter 74d in step S1908, and the number of betting for this game is added to the total winning number counter 74d in step S1910. It will be done. Therefore, even if the updating process is executed, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d remains constant.

(43) In the second section SC2, the section display section 67 is in a lighting state (that is, in a display state). That is, it may be configured to be in a non-display state). Further, in this case, the combined display unit 66 may be configured to display information corresponding to the type of abnormal state. In such a configuration in which the shared display section 66 and the section display section 67 are collectively provided in the common display area 68, the section display section 67 is extinguished when a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10. By performing display corresponding to the type of abnormal state on the dual-use display unit 66 after setting the state, even when the same abnormal state occurs, common display is performed depending on whether it is the second section SC2 or not. Since the event that the display mode of the area 68 changes does not occur, it becomes easier to identify the type of abnormal state.

(44) A configuration that stores the total number of games played and the number of advantageous games, which is the total number of games played in the second section SC2, as history information, and calculates the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times a predetermined combination has been won and the total number of games to be drawn in the combination lottery process are stored as history information, and the probability of winning the predetermined combination is calculated. may be In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as target predetermined combinations, and the number of wins for each of the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination is individually stored as history information, and the first predetermined combination is stored as history information. The winning probability may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. Further, the number of wins for each combination may be individually stored as history information, and the probability of winning may be calculated for each combination. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the winning probability of the combination to be managed.

Further, the total number of awarded game media and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the number of awarded game media per unit number of games may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the number of game media provided per unit number of games. Also, the combination of the total number of awarded game media and the total number of games is stored as history information for each game state and the second section SC2 individually, and the number of awarded game media per unit number of games is stored for each game state. The game state and the second section SC2 may be individually calculated.

(45) In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, so that it is not limited to a configuration that is more advantageous than the gaming state that is not in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The pseudo-bonus state ST4 may be advantageous by increasing the number of game media provided when is established.

(46) The notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration in which the combination display section 66 and the section display section 67 are used. , the credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66 may be used. Further, when there are a plurality of types of calculation results to be notified, the configuration may be such that each type of event to be notified is sequentially switched and displayed. When the display is sequentially switched in this way, for example, the type of event to be notified is displayed on the credit display section 65, and the calculation result of the event to be notified or the content of the calculation result is displayed on the combined display section 66. A configuration in which corresponding information is displayed may be adopted. As a result, even when there are a plurality of types of events to be notified, it is possible to notify the plurality of types of events to be notified using a small number of display units.

(47) A configuration may be adopted in which the upper limit of the number of continuous games is set for the first section SC1 as well. In this case, when the number of games continuously executed in the first section SC1 reaches the upper limit number of games, the second section SC2 is set. As a result, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the first section SC1 has continued until the upper limit number of games is reached. In addition, by setting the upper limit number of games in the first section SC1 to be the same among the set values of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", it is possible to prevent the upper limit number of games from being advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the set value. becomes possible.

(48) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the effective line is only one main line ML, and the configuration may be such that the effective line is two, three, or four or more. In this case, the number of activated lines may increase as the number of betted game media increases, or the maximum number of activated lines may be set regardless of the number of betted game media.

(49) The type of information transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 is not limited to those in the above embodiments. Information on the number of game media played may be transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 . In this case, the information on the number of game media to be provided by winning can be notified on the image display device 63 or the like. Further, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, if the rotation of some of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped or stopped, the information corresponding to that is sent to the main side. It may be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 . In this case, the image display device 63 or the like can perform an effect corresponding to the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

(50) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the privilege of paying out medals is awarded when a minor win is established, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and a configuration in which some kind of privilege is awarded to the player. If it is For example, it may be configured such that prizes other than medals are paid out when a minor win is established. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion and medal payout functions and that manages the medals owned by the player as credits, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of benefits.

(51) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B-type slot machine, a C-type, a combination of A and C types, a combination of B and C types, RT games, CT games or AT machines. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type equipped with games. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which there is a bonus state that is advantageous to the player.

(52) The symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., and may be geometric lines, figures, and the like. Also, it is possible to compose a pattern with light, color, etc., and a pattern can be configured with a three-dimensional shape, etc., or a composite of these can compose a pattern. In other words, the pattern may be anything as long as it functions as identifiable information.

(53) In each of the above-described embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, but the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which games are played using game balls as game media. You may apply it to the game machine of the form which fused with the machine.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. Situation setting means for setting the advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2) (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1805 in the main MPU 72; in the fourth embodiment, the processing of step S3504 in the main MPU 72 (a function of executing the process of step S3605 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
Advantageous transition means (in the first embodiment, steps S2203, S2206 and A function of executing the process of step S2213, a function of executing the process of step S3803 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
Situation continuation means for continuing the advantageous transition possible situation when the advantageous gaming state ends (function for executing the processing of steps S2711 to S2713 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, the main in the fifth embodiment a function of executing the processing of steps S3905 and S3906 in the side MPU 72);
with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous transition means can transition the game state to the advantageous game state in the advantageous transition possible situation continued by the situation continuation means.

According to the feature A1, since the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the advantageous transition possible state, the player who expects the transition to the advantageous gaming state expects to be in the advantageous transition possible state. In this case, when the advantageous game state ends, the advantageous transition possible situation may be continued, and in the continued advantageous transition possible situation, the game state may be shifted to the advantageous game state. This makes it possible for the player to expect the occurrence of a further advantageous game state even if the advantageous game state ends once.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, further comprising a predetermined termination means (a function of executing the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72) for terminating both the advantageous gaming state and the advantageous transition possible state.

According to feature A2, not only the case where the advantageous transition possible situation is continued when the advantageous game state ends, but also the case where both the advantageous game state and the advantageous transition possible situation end exist. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the advantageous shift possible situation continues when the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature A3. Advantageous termination means (in the first embodiment, the main side MPU 72 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment A function of executing the processing of steps S2710 to S2716, a function of executing the processing of step S3905 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
Situation terminating means for terminating the advantageous transition possible situation based on the satisfaction of the situation ending condition (the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied) in the advantageous transition possible situation (the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72 is functions to perform) and
means for terminating the advantageous game state even if the advantageous end condition is not satisfied when the situation end condition is satisfied in the advantageous game state (function for executing the process of step S1914 in the main side MPU 72);
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A3, when the situation end condition is met in the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is also ended with the end of the advantageous shift possible situation even if the advantageous end condition is not met. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous game state from continuing for an excessively long time. Further, in the case of this configuration, not only the case where the advantageous transition possible situation is continued when the advantageous game state ends, but also the case where both the advantageous game state and the advantageous transition possible situation end exist. As a result, it is possible to diversify whether or not to continue the advantageous transition possible state when the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature A4. The situation terminating means determines that the situation terminating condition is met when the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches an upper limit number of games, and terminates the advantageous transition possible situation. The gaming machine according to feature A3.

According to feature A4, the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the maximum number of games, so the advantageous transition possible situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature A5. The situation ending means determines whether the game is executed when the advantageous transition possible situation continues from the total number of game media awarded by the game executed when the advantageous transition possible situation continues. When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of consumed game media is used as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as a predetermined reference value, and the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value is the upper limit difference. The gaming machine according to feature A3 or A4, wherein it is determined that the situation end condition is established when the number is reached, and the advantageous shift possible situation is ended.

According to feature A5, the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the fact that the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so that the advantageous transition possible situation becomes excessive. It is possible to prevent it from continuing for a long time.

Feature A6. The situation end condition is a condition that is established by repeating the game in the advantageous transition possible situation,
A configuration in which a predetermined pre-termination condition is satisfied before the situation termination condition is satisfied by repeating the game in the advantageous transition possible situation,
The advantageous transition means confirms that the predetermined pre-termination condition is established in the advantageous transition possible situation continued by the situation continuation means (the value of the number of continued games counter 74c becomes equal to or greater than the second reference number of games, or The value of the total number of wins counter 74d becomes equal to or greater than the second reference number of wins), means for shifting the game state to the advantageous game state (the function of executing the processing of step S2206 in the main side MPU 72). The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A5, characterized in that

According to the feature A6, when the advantageous transition possible situation continues after the advantageous gaming state ends, the situation end condition of the advantageous transition possible situation is satisfied and the predetermined end is made before the advantageous transition possible situation ends. When the precondition is met, the game shifts to an advantageous game state. As a result, even after the advantageous game state ends, even though the advantageous shift possible state continues, the advantageous shift possible state does not end without further shifting to the advantageous game state. becomes possible.

Feature A7. The situation end condition is a condition that is established by repeating the game in the advantageous transition possible situation,
By repeating the game in the advantageous transition possible situation, a specific pre-end condition is satisfied before the situation end condition is satisfied (the sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c and the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is the first or the sum of the value of the total winning number counter 74d and the value obtained by multiplying the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter by the expected winning value becomes equal to or greater than the first standard winning number. ,
The situation termination means terminates the advantageous transition possible situation even if the situation termination condition is not satisfied when the advantageous gaming state is terminated in a situation where the specific pre-termination condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A6.

According to the characteristic A7, when the advantageous gaming state ends in a situation where a specific pre-end condition is established, the advantageous shift possible situation is ended even if the situation end condition is not established. As a result, in a situation where the conditions for terminating the situation where the advantageous transition is possible are about to be satisfied, it is possible to prevent the advantageous transition-possible situation from continuing when the advantageous game state ends. Therefore, even though the transition to the advantageous game state has occurred, the situation end condition is immediately satisfied, and the advantageous game state ends with the end of the advantageous transition possible situation. It becomes possible to

Feature A8. Add-on means for executing add-on processing for increasing the number of games to be executed until the end of the advantageous game state based on the occurrence of an add-on opportunity in the above-mentioned advantageous game state (a step in the main side MPU 72 S2603 ~ step S2616 and step S2703 ~ step S2708 function) provided,
The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the adding means does not execute the adding process even if the adding opportunity occurs when the specific pre-end condition is satisfied in the advantageous gaming state. .

According to feature A8, when a specific pre-end condition is established in an advantageous gaming state, the addition processing is not executed even if an addition opportunity occurs, so that the addition processing is executed. , it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the advantageous game state is terminated as the situation termination condition is established and the advantageous transition possible state is terminated.

Feature A9. End condition notification means for notifying the advantageous end condition in the advantageous game state (function for executing the processing of steps S2512, S2513 and S2817 in the effect side MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to feature A7 or A8, wherein the termination condition notification means prevents notification of the advantageous termination condition in the advantageous gaming state when the specific pre-termination condition is satisfied.

According to feature A9, when a specific pre-end condition is established, the advantageous end condition is not reported in the advantageous game state. As a result, even though the advantageous end condition is not satisfied, when the situation end condition is satisfied and the advantageous transition possible state ends, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable when the advantageous game state ends. It is possible to

For the configuration of features A1 to A9, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of H10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. Situation setting means (function for executing the process of step S3105 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) for setting an advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantageous transition means (main side MPU 72 of the third embodiment executes the process of step S3206 for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state (pseudo-bonus state ST4) advantageous to the player in the case of the above-mentioned advantageous transition possible state. function) and
Situation continuation means for continuing the advantageous transition possible situation when the advantageous gaming state ends (function for executing the processing of steps S3310 to S3312 in the main side MPU 72 of the third embodiment);
Transition restriction means for restricting the transition of the advantageous gaming state in the advantageous transition possible situation continued by the situation continuation means (function of executing the processing of steps S3213 to S3216 in the main side MPU 72 of the third embodiment) and,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B1, since the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the advantageous transition possible state, the player who expects the transition to the advantageous gaming state expects to be in the advantageous transition possible state. In this case, when the advantageous game state ends, the advantageous transition possible situation may be continued, and the transition to the advantageous game state is restricted in the continued advantageous transition possible situation. As a result, while the conditions for transition to the advantageous game state when the advantageous transition possible state is newly started are fixed, the situation in which the transition to the advantageous game state is restricted after the advantageous game state ends is forced. can be generated.

Feature B2. Based on the fact that the cancellation condition is satisfied in the situation where the advantageous transition is possible but not the advantageous gaming state (the number of remaining games to be canceled becomes "0" or the cancellation is won in the cancellation lottery process) , means for terminating the advantageous shift possible situation (function of executing the processing of step S1914 in the main MPU 72, function of executing the processing of steps S3215 and S3216 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized by:

According to the feature B2, the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the fact that the release condition is established in the situation in which the advantageous transition possible but not in the advantageous gaming state. Then, when the advantageous transferable state ends, a transition to an advantageous gaming state can occur with the start of a new advantageous transferable state. Therefore, the player expects the cancellation condition to be satisfied in a situation in which an advantageous transition is possible but not in an advantageous gaming state.

Feature B3. Means for terminating the advantageous shift possible situation (at step S3214 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment A gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized by comprising a function of making an affirmative determination and executing the processing of steps S3215 and S3216.

According to the feature B3, when the advantageous gaming state ends, the advantageous shift possible state ends based on the completion of the determined number of games to be released. In the non-playing state, the player expects that the number of unlocked games will be completed quickly.

Feature B4. Means for executing a release lottery process in a situation in which the advantageous transition is possible but not in the advantageous gaming state (function for executing the process of step S3218 in the main side MPU 72 of the third embodiment);
Means for terminating the advantageous shift possible situation based on the fact that the cancellation lottery process has resulted in a cancellation lottery process (the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment makes an affirmative determination in step S3219, and steps S3215 and S3216 function to execute the processing of
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic B4, the advantageous transition possible state ends when the cancellation lottery process is canceled in the cancellation lottery process executed in a situation where the advantageous transition possible state is not the advantageous gaming state, and therefore the advantageous transition possible state ends. However, in a situation where the game is not in an advantageous game state, the player expects that the release lottery process will be executed and that the release lottery process will result in a release winning.

Feature B5. Advantageous termination means (in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) for terminating the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the advantageous termination condition is established in the advantageous gaming state (the remaining number of continuous games becomes "0") a function to execute the process of step S3310);
Situation terminating means for terminating the advantageous transition possible situation based on the satisfaction of the situation ending condition (the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied) in the advantageous transition possible situation (the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72 is function) and
means for terminating the advantageous game state even if the advantageous end condition is not satisfied when the situation end condition is satisfied in the advantageous game state (function for executing the process of step S1914 in the main side MPU 72);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic B5, when the situation end condition is established in the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is also ended with the end of the advantageous shift possible situation even if the advantageous end condition is not established. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous game state from continuing for an excessively long time. Further, in the case of this configuration, not only the case where the advantageous transition possible situation is continued when the advantageous game state ends, but also the case where both the advantageous game state and the advantageous transition possible situation end exist. As a result, it is possible to diversify whether or not to continue the advantageous transition possible state when the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature B6. The situation terminating means determines that the situation terminating condition is met when the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches an upper limit number of games, and terminates the advantageous transition possible situation. The gaming machine according to feature B5.

According to feature B6, the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the maximum number of games, so the advantageous transition possible situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature B7. The situation ending means determines whether the game is executed when the advantageous transition possible situation continues from the total number of game media awarded by the game executed when the advantageous transition possible situation continues. When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of consumed game media is used as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as a predetermined reference value, and the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value is the upper limit difference. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein it is determined that the situation end condition is met when the number is reached, and the advantageous shift possible situation is ended.

According to feature B7, the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the fact that the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so that the advantageous transition possible situation becomes excessive. It is possible to prevent it from continuing for a long time.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the advantageous transition means transitions the game state to the advantageous game state based on the start of the advantageous transition possible state.

According to the feature B8, the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs based on the start of the advantageous transition possible state, so in a situation where the advantageous transition possible state is not the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous transition possible state is The player will expect to finish early.

Feature B9. A game can be started when a predetermined number (“2” or “3”) of game media is set to bet,
The advantageous transition means is configured such that a first predetermined number (“3”) of the predetermined number of game media is used in a game to be branched, which is one of the game in which the advantageous transition possible situation has started and the game that occurs thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that it is possible to shift the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state based on a bet being set.

According to feature B9, the game state is changed to the advantageous game state based on the first predetermined number of game media being bet-set in the game to be branched when or after the advantageous shift possible situation is started. , it is basically possible to shift to an advantageous game state when an advantageous shift possible situation is newly started.

Feature B10. When a second predetermined number (“2”) of the predetermined number of game media is set to bet in the game to be branched, the advantageous transition possible state but not the advantageous gaming state is defined as a non-advantageous state. The gaming machine according to feature B9, characterized by comprising setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3208 and S3209 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment).

According to the feature B10, the manager of the gaming hall, who thinks that it is not desirable for the game hall to immediately switch to an advantageous gaming state when the gaming hall starts operating, generates an advantageous transition situation in advance and the game to be branched. By setting the second predetermined number of game media to bet in , it is possible to intentionally create a situation in which an advantageous transition is possible but not in an advantageous gaming state.

Feature B11. Characteristic B10, characterized in that the transition restricting means restricts the transition to the advantageous gaming state in a situation in which the advantageous transition possible state set by the non-advantageous setting means is not the advantageous gaming state. game machine.

According to the characteristic B11, when the advantageous transition possible state is newly started, the second predetermined number of game media are bet-set in the game to be branched, so that the advantageous transition possible state is not the advantageous gaming state. When such a situation occurs, the transition to the advantageous gaming state is restricted in the advantageous transition possible situation. As a result, it is possible to intentionally create a situation in which the transition to the advantageous game state does not occur for a while after the game hall starts operating.

Feature B12. The situation setting means sets the advantageous transition possible situation based on execution of a game in which the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet in a situation that is not the advantageous transition possible situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features B9 to B11.

According to the feature B12, when the game in which the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet is executed in a situation where the advantageous transition is not possible, the situation is set to the advantageous transition possible state. Also, it is considered that the player plays the game in a state in which the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet. As a result, basically, it is possible to cause a transition to an advantageous gaming state when an advantageous transition possible situation newly occurs.

Feature B13. a winning lottery means for executing a winning lottery process in each game (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72);
Correspondence control execution means (function of executing the processing of steps S309 and S310 in the main side MPU 72) for executing the control corresponding to the winning on the basis of the establishment of the winning corresponding to the winning combination in the winning lottery process and,
with
Characteristic features B1 to B12, characterized in that the situation setting means sets the advantageous transition possible situation based on winning any combination in the lottery process of the combination in the situation where the advantageous transition possible situation is not possible. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature B13, the situation is set to the advantageous transition possible state based on winning any combination in the combination lottery process in a situation where the advantageous transition possible state is not possible. It becomes possible to cause the transition to the transitionable state at an early stage.

For the configuration of features B1 to B13, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of H10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. In a gaming machine in which a game can be started when a predetermined number (“2” or “3”) of game media is set to bet,
Situation setting means (function for executing the process of step S3105 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) for setting an advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
A first predetermined number (“3”) of the predetermined number of game media are set to bet in a game to be branched, which is one of the game in which the advantageous transition possible situation is started and the game that occurs thereafter. , the advantageous transition means (the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment executes the processing of step S3206) that allows the game state to transition to an advantageous game state (pseudo-bonus state ST4) that is advantageous to the player. function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C1, the game state is changed to the advantageous game state based on the first predetermined number of game media being bet-set in the game to be branched, which occurs when or after the advantageous shift possible state is started. can shift, basically it is possible to shift to an advantageous gaming state when the advantageous shift possible situation is newly started. Therefore, the player expects that the advantageous shift possible situation will be newly started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C2. When a second predetermined number (“2”) of the predetermined number of game media is set to bet in the game to be branched, the advantageous transition possible state but not the advantageous gaming state is defined as a non-advantageous state. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized by comprising setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3208 and S3209 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment).

According to feature C2, the manager of the gaming hall, who believes that it is not desirable for the game hall to immediately switch to an advantageous gaming state when the gaming hall starts operating, generates an advantageous transition situation in advance and the game to be branched. By setting the second predetermined number of game media to bet in , it is possible to intentionally create a situation in which an advantageous transition is possible but not in an advantageous gaming state.

Feature C3. Transition restriction means (step S3213 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) for restricting the transition of the advantageous gaming state in the situation where the advantageous transition possible situation set by the non-advantageous setting means is not the advantageous gaming state to the function of executing the processing of step S3216).

According to the characteristic C3, when the advantageous transition possible state is newly started, the second predetermined number of game media are bet-set in the game to be branched, so that the advantageous transition possible state is not the advantageous gaming state. When such a situation occurs, the transition to the advantageous gaming state is restricted in the advantageous transition possible situation. As a result, it is possible to intentionally create a situation in which the transition to the advantageous game state does not occur for a while after the game hall starts operating.

Feature C4. Based on the fact that the cancellation condition is satisfied in the situation where the advantageous transition is possible but not the advantageous gaming state (the number of remaining games to be canceled becomes "0" or the cancellation is won in the cancellation lottery process) , means for terminating the advantageous shift possible situation (function of executing the processing of step S1914 in the main MPU 72, function of executing the processing of steps S3215 and S3216 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature C3, characterized by:

According to the feature C4, the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the fact that the release condition is established in the situation in which the advantageous transition possible but not in the advantageous gaming state. Then, when the advantageous transferable state ends, a transition to an advantageous gaming state can occur with the start of a new advantageous transferable state. Therefore, the player expects the cancellation condition to be satisfied in a situation in which an advantageous transition is possible but not in an advantageous gaming state.

Feature C5. Means for terminating the advantageous shift possible situation (at step S3214 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment A gaming machine according to feature C3 or C4, characterized by comprising a function of making an affirmative determination and executing the processing of steps S3215 and S3216.

According to the feature C5, when the advantageous gaming state ends, the advantageous shift possible state ends based on the completion of the determined number of games to be released. In the non-playing state, the player expects that the number of unlocked games will be completed quickly.

Feature C6. Means for executing a release lottery process in a situation in which the advantageous transition is possible but not in the advantageous gaming state (function for executing the process of step S3218 in the main side MPU 72 of the third embodiment);
Means for terminating the advantageous shift possible situation based on the fact that the cancellation lottery process has resulted in a cancellation lottery process (the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment makes an affirmative determination in step S3219, and steps S3215 and S3216 function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C5, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C6, the advantageous transition possible state ends when the cancellation lottery process is canceled in the cancellation lottery process executed in the situation where the advantageous transition possible state is not the advantageous gaming state, and therefore the advantageous transition possible state ends. However, in a situation where the game is not in an advantageous game state, the player expects that the release lottery process will be executed and that the release lottery process will result in a release winning.

Feature C7. The situation setting means can set the advantageous transition possible situation based on execution of a game in which the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet in a situation that is not the advantageous transition possible situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6.

According to the feature C7, the advantageous transition possible state can be set based on the execution of the game in which the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet in a situation where the advantageous transition possible state is not possible. Also, it is considered that the player plays the game in a state in which the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet. As a result, basically, it is possible to cause a transition to an advantageous gaming state when an advantageous transition possible situation newly occurs.

Feature C8. a winning lottery means for executing a winning lottery process in each game (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72);
Correspondence control execution means (function of executing the processing of steps S309 and S310 in the main side MPU 72) for executing the control corresponding to the winning on the basis of the establishment of the winning corresponding to the winning combination in the winning lottery process and,
with
Characteristic features C1 to C7, characterized in that the situation setting means sets the advantageous transition possible situation based on winning any combination in the lottery process of the combination in the situation where the advantageous transition possible situation is not possible. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature C8, the advantageous transition possible state is set based on the winning of any combination in the combination lottery process in the situation where the advantageous transition possible state is not possible, so the advantageous transition possible state is set to be advantageous from the non-advantage shift possible state. It becomes possible to cause the transition to the transitionable state at an early stage.

For the configuration of features C1 to C8, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of H10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Situation setting means (function for executing the process of step S3504 in the main MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment) for setting an advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantageous transition means (main side MPU 72 executes steps S2203, S2206 and S2213 in the main side MPU 72 for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state (pseudo-bonus state ST4) in the case of the advantageous transition possible state. function) and
with
Depending on whether or not the situation set to the advantageous shift possible situation is a predetermined situation (situation in which the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74), the advantageous shift possible situation A game machine characterized by the presence or absence of transition to an advantageous game state or a transition mode being different.

According to feature D1, since the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the advantageous transition possible state, the player who expects the transition to the advantageous gaming state expects to be in the advantageous transition possible state. In this case, depending on whether or not the situation set to the advantageous transition possible situation is a predetermined situation, the presence or absence of transition to the advantageous gaming state in the advantageous transition possible situation or the transition mode differs. As a result, the player pays attention not only to the occurrence of the advantageous shift possible situation, but also to whether or not the predetermined situation exists. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2. Provided with predetermined information storage means (main side RAM 74) capable of storing predetermined information (first CB winning data or second CB winning data),
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the predetermined situation is a situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.

According to the characteristic D2, the transition to the advantageous gaming state in the advantageous transition possible state is made depending on whether or not the situation set to the advantageous transition possible state is a state in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means. The presence or absence of or the transition mode is different. As a result, the player pays attention not only to the occurrence of an advantageous shift possible situation, but also to whether or not the prescribed information is stored in the prescribed information storage means.

Feature D3. Information erasing means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means (function for executing partial clear processing and full clear processing in the main side MPU 72) based on the start of supply of operating power. prepared,
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means is not erased when the advantageous shift possible situation ends.

According to feature D3, the predetermined information may not be stored in the predetermined information storage means immediately after the supply of the operating power is started. It is never erased. As a result, whether or not there is a transition to an advantageous gaming state in an advantageous transition possible situation that occurs immediately after the supply of operating power is started and an advantageous transition possible situation that occurs again after the already occurring advantageous transition possible situation It is possible to make the mode of transition different.

Feature D4. means for executing setting value determination processing for determining a setting value to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of step S106 in the main side MPU 72);
The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the information erasing means erases the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storing means when the set value determination process is executed.

According to the feature D4, when the process of determining the setting value to be used is executed, the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means, so immediately after this, an advantageous shift possible situation occurs. In that case, the presence or absence of transition to the advantageous game state or the transition mode corresponds to the situation in which the predetermined information is not stored.

Feature D5. A role lottery means for executing a lottery process of a role in each game (a function of executing the processing of steps S3401 to S3408 in the main side MPU 72);
Correspondence control execution means (function of executing the processing of steps S309 and S310 in the main side MPU 72) for executing the control corresponding to the winning on the basis of the establishment of the winning corresponding to the winning combination in the winning lottery process and,
means for storing the predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means (function for executing the processing of step S3409 in the main MPU 72) when a predetermined winning combination (index value IV=17) is won in the lottery process for the winning combination;
with
Even if a predetermined winning corresponding to the predetermined combination is not established in the game in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, the state in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means is maintained. The game machine according to any one of features D2 to D4, characterized in that

According to the feature D5, when the predetermined combination is won in the lottery process for the combination, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means. Depending on whether or not it is in the state, it is possible to differentiate the presence or absence of transition to the advantageous game state or the transition mode when the advantageous transition possible state is set.

Feature D6. The situation setting means sets the advantageous transition possible situation based on winning at least the predetermined winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination in a situation that is not the advantageous transition possible situation,
The memory determination processing (processing of step S3505 in the main MPU 72) for determining whether or not the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means in the game set to the advantageous shift possible state is more important than the winning lottery processing. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the processing is executed after and before the process of storing the predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means.

According to the feature D6, even if a predetermined combination is won in the lottery process for a combination in a game set to an advantageous transition possible state, predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means for the winning of the predetermined combination. It is determined whether or not the situation set to the favorable shift possible situation is a situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means. As a result, in order to determine that the situation in which the advantageous shift possible situation is set is the situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, the game prior to the game in which the advantageous shift possible situation is set is required. It is necessary to win a predetermined combination in the lottery process of the combination.

Feature D7. The predetermined information is information indicating that the predetermined combination has been won in the lottery process for the combination,
Characteristic D5 or D6, characterized in that when the predetermined prize is established in a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means is erased. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature D7, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects by using information indicating that a predetermined combination has been won in the combination lottery process.

Feature D8. When the predetermined combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the special combination (10th supplementary combination) is also won,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D5 to D7, wherein establishment of a specific winning (10th complementary winning) corresponding to the specific combination is prioritized over establishment of the predetermined winning.

According to the feature D8, even if a predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process, establishment of a specific prize corresponding to a specific combination that is won at the same time is prioritized. can be maintained until the game after the game in which the predetermined combination is won in the lottery process of the combination.

Feature D9. The advantageous transition means is a transition execution means (a main part of the fourth embodiment) that allows the game state to transition to the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the advantageous transition possible state is set in the predetermined situation. a function to execute the processing of steps S3506 to S3508 in the side MPU 72),
Any of the characteristics D1 to D8 characterized in that when the advantageous transition possible situation is set in a situation that is not the predetermined situation, the game state is the advantageous transition possible situation but not the advantageous gaming state. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to feature D9, the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state based on the fact that an advantageous transition possible state is set in a predetermined situation, and when the advantageous transition possible state is set in a situation other than the predetermined situation, the advantageous transition possible state is established. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to set the advantageous transition possible state in the predetermined situation. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the predetermined situation exists.

Feature D10. The migration executing means is
Means for executing the advantageous transfer lottery process based on the setting to the advantageous transfer possible situation in the predetermined situation (function for executing the process of step S3506 in the main MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment);
Means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state based on the transition winning in the advantageous transition lottery process (function for executing the processing of step S3508 in the main side MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature D9, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature D10, even if an advantageous shift possible state is set in a predetermined situation, the shift to the advantageous gaming state does not occur unless a transition win is made in the advantageous shift lottery process. As a result, the player expects to be set to a situation in which an advantageous transition is possible in a predetermined situation, and expects to win a transition in the advantageous transition lottery process when the situation is set to be in an advantageous transition possible state in the predetermined situation. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the objects that the player pays attention to.

Feature D11. The advantageous transition means provides a predetermined transition opportunity (e.g., a transition winning in the transition lottery process in step S2112 or when the number of remaining unlocked games reaches "0") occurs, regardless of whether or not the predetermined situation is met, the means for shifting the game state to the advantageous game state (step S2213 in the main MPU 72 is executed) function).

According to the feature D11, when the situation continues in which the game state is in the advantageous transition possible state but not in the advantageous game state, the predetermined transition opportunity is generated regardless of whether or not the predetermined state exists. A transition to an advantageous game state occurs. As a result, the conditions necessary for transitioning to the advantageous game state when the advantageous transition possible state is newly set and when the situation where the advantageous transition possible state but not the advantageous game state continues can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the transition mode of the advantageous gaming state in relation to the advantageous transition possible state.

For the configuration of features D1 to D11, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of H10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. Situation setting means (function for executing the process of step S3504 in the main MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment) for setting an advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantageous transition means (main side MPU 72 executes steps S2203, S2206 and S2213 in the main side MPU 72 for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state (pseudo-bonus state ST4) in the case of the advantageous transition possible state. function) and
with
The advantageous transition means are
A first transition means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2203 and S3508 in the main side MPU 72) for shifting the game state to the advantageous game state based on being set to the advantageous transition possible state;
Second transition means (a function of executing the processing of step S2213 in the main MPU 72) for shifting the game state to the advantageous game state in the situation where the game state is the advantageous transition possible state but not the advantageous game state; ,
with
A condition for the transition to the advantageous game state by the first transition means and a condition for the transition to the advantageous game state by the second transition means are different. game machine.

According to the feature E1, the transition to the advantageous game state can occur based on the fact that the advantageous transition possible state is set, and it is advantageous even in the situation where the advantageous transition possible state is not the advantageous game state. A transition to a game state can occur. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the advantageous shift possible situation. In this case, when the advantageous transition possible situation is newly set, and when the situation where the advantageous transition possible situation but not the advantageous game state continues, the situation necessary for the transition to the advantageous game state Different conditions. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the mode of transition to the advantageous gaming state in relation to the situation in which the advantageous transition is possible.

Feature E2. The first shifting means shifts the game to the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the advantageous transition possible state is set in a predetermined situation (situation in which the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74). It is possible to shift the state, and when the advantageous transition possible state is set in a state other than the predetermined state, the game state is not shifted to the advantageous game state,
The second transition means provides a predetermined transition opportunity (e.g., transition winning in the transition lottery process of step S2112 or the number of remaining unlocked games becomes "0"), the game state can be shifted to the advantageous game state regardless of whether or not the predetermined situation exists. The game machine described.

According to the feature E2, when the advantageous transition possible situation is newly set, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the predetermined situation is met. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the predetermined transition opportunity occurs when the situation of the non-playing state continues.

Feature E3. The first transfer means is
Means for executing the advantageous transfer lottery process based on the setting to the advantageous transfer possible situation in the predetermined situation (function for executing the process of step S3506 in the main MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment);
Means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state based on the transition winning in the advantageous transition lottery process (function for executing the processing of step S3508 in the main side MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E3, even if an advantageous transition possible state is set in a predetermined situation, the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur unless the transition is won in the advantageous transition lottery process. As a result, the player expects to be set to a situation in which an advantageous transition is possible in a predetermined situation, and expects to win a transition in the advantageous transition lottery process when the situation is set to be in an advantageous transition possible state in the predetermined situation. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the objects that the player pays attention to.

Feature E4. Provided with predetermined information storage means (main side RAM 74) capable of storing predetermined information (first CB winning data or second CB winning data),
The gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, wherein the predetermined situation is a situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.

According to the feature E4, the transition to the advantageous gaming state in the advantageous transition possible state depends on whether or not the situation set to the advantageous transition possible state is a state in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means. The presence or absence of or the transition mode is different. As a result, the player pays attention not only to the occurrence of an advantageous shift possible situation, but also to whether or not the prescribed information is stored in the prescribed information storage means.

Feature E5. Information erasing means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means (function for executing partial clear processing and full clear processing in the main side MPU 72) based on the start of supply of operating power. prepared,
The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized in that the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means is not erased when the advantageous shift possible situation ends.

According to feature E5, the predetermined information may not be stored in the predetermined information storage means immediately after the supply of operating power is started. It is never erased. As a result, whether or not there is a transition to an advantageous gaming state in an advantageous transition possible situation that occurs immediately after the supply of operating power is started and an advantageous transition possible situation that occurs again after the already occurring advantageous transition possible situation It is possible to make the mode of transition different.

Feature E6. means for executing setting value determination processing for determining a setting value to be used from among multiple stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function for executing the processing of step S106 in the main side MPU 72);
The gaming machine according to feature E5, wherein the information erasing means erases the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storing means when the set value determination process is executed.

According to the feature E6, when the process of determining the set value to be used is executed, the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means, so immediately after this, an advantageous shift possible situation occurs. In that case, the presence or absence of transition to the advantageous game state or the transition mode corresponds to the situation in which the predetermined information is not stored.

Feature E7. A role lottery means for executing a lottery process of a role in each game (a function of executing the processing of steps S3401 to S3408 in the main side MPU 72);
Correspondence control execution means (function of executing the processing of steps S309 and S310 in the main side MPU 72) for executing the control corresponding to the winning on the basis of the establishment of the winning corresponding to the winning combination in the winning lottery process and,
means for storing the predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means (function for executing the processing of step S3409 in the main MPU 72) when a predetermined winning combination (index value IV=17) is won in the lottery process for the winning combination;
with
Even if a predetermined winning corresponding to the predetermined combination is not established in the game in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, the state in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means is maintained. The game machine according to any one of features E4 to E6, characterized in that

According to the feature E7, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means when the predetermined combination is won in the lottery process of the combination. Depending on whether or not it is in the state, it is possible to differentiate the presence or absence of transition to the advantageous game state or the transition mode when the advantageous transition possible state is set.

Feature E8. The situation setting means sets the advantageous transition possible situation based on winning at least the predetermined winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination in a situation that is not the advantageous transition possible situation,
The memory determination processing (processing of step S3505 in the main MPU 72) for determining whether or not the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means in the game set to the advantageous shift possible state is more important than the winning lottery processing. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the processing is executed after and before the process of storing the predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means.

According to feature E8, even if a predetermined combination is won in the lottery process for a combination in a game set to an advantageous shift possible state, predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means for the winning of the predetermined combination. It is determined whether or not the situation in which the advantageous shift possible situation has been previously set is a situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means. As a result, in order for the situation in which the advantageous shift possible situation is set to be the situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, it is necessary to draw a winning combination in the game prior to the game in which the advantageous shift possible situation is set. In the process, it is necessary to win the predetermined combination.

Feature E9. The predetermined information is information indicating that the predetermined combination has been won in the lottery process for the combination,
Characteristic feature E7 or E8, characterized in that the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means is erased when the predetermined prize is established in a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature E9, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects by using information indicating that a predetermined combination has been won in the combination lottery process.

Feature E10. When the predetermined combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the special combination (10th supplementary combination) is also won,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E7 to E9, wherein establishment of a specific winning (10th compensation winning) corresponding to the specific combination is prioritized over establishment of the predetermined winning.

According to feature E10, even if a predetermined winning combination is won in the combination lottery process, establishment of a specific winning combination corresponding to a specific combination winning at the same time is prioritized. can be maintained until the game after the game in which the predetermined combination is won in the lottery process of the combination.

For the configuration of features E1 to E10, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of H10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Situation setting means (function for executing the process of step S3605 in the main MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment) for setting an advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantageous transition means for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state (pseudo-bonus state ST4) that is advantageous to the player (main-side MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment executes the processing of step S3803 in the fifth embodiment. function) and
End time expectation setting means (function of executing the processing of step S3906 in the main side MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment) for setting the end time expectation state (second CZ state ST7) when the advantageous gaming state is ended;
with
The expected state at the end is a game characterized in that it is easier to shift to the advantageous game state than a predetermined game state (normal game state ST1) which is the state in which the expected state at the end is possible but not the expected state at the end. machine.

According to the feature F1, since the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the profit transition possible state, the player who expects the transition to the advantageous gaming state expects to be in the advantageous transition possible state. In this case, when the advantageous game state ends, the end expected state is set so as to easily shift to the advantageous game state. This makes it possible for the player to expect the transition to the advantageous game state again even if the advantageous game state ends.

Feature F2. When the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur in the expected state at the end, the means for ending the advantageous transition possible state (the processing of steps S3817 and S3818 in the main side MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment is executed function).

According to the feature F2, when the end-time expected state ends without transition to the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous transition possible state ends. As a result, when the expected state at the end ends without the transition to the advantageous game state occurring, the advantageous transition possible state is prevented from continuing in a state where the degree of expectation for the transition to the advantageous game state is low. becomes possible.

Feature F3. Based on the fact that the advantageous transition possible state is set, a start expectation setting means (fifth A gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S3606 in the main MPU 72 of the embodiment.

According to the feature F3, when the advantageous shift possible state is newly set, the expected state at the start is set so that the advantageous game state can be easily shifted. As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the new setting of the advantageous transition possible state.

In particular, when the configuration of the feature F2 is provided, even if the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur in the expected state at the end, if the advantageous transition possible state is newly set after that, the expected state at the start becomes. This makes it possible to increase the probability of returning to the advantageous game state after the advantageous game state ends. In addition, in the case of this configuration, when the advantageous gaming state ends, both the expected state at the end and the expected state at the start occur sequentially. If it is set to , only the starting expectation state will occur. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability of returning to the advantageous game state after the advantageous game state ends without setting the probability of transition to the advantageous game state immediately after the supply of operating power is started so high.

Feature F4. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the predetermined gaming state is entered when no transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the expected state at start.

According to the feature F4, even if the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur in the expected state at the start, the predetermined gaming state is entered, so the situation where the advantageous transition is possible but not the advantageous gaming state continues. It is possible to

Feature F5. a winning lottery means for executing a winning lottery process in each game (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72);
Correspondence control execution means (function of executing the processing of steps S309 and S310 in the main side MPU 72) for executing the control corresponding to the winning on the basis of the establishment of the winning corresponding to the winning combination in the winning lottery process and,
with
Features F1 to F4, characterized in that the situation setting means sets the advantageous transition possible situation based on winning one of the winning combinations in the lottery process of the winning combination in a situation where the advantageous transition possible situation is not possible. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature F5, the advantageous transition possible state is set based on winning any combination in the combination lottery process in a situation where the advantageous transition possible state is not possible, so the advantageous transition possible state is set to an advantageous state. It becomes possible to cause the transition to the transitionable state at an early stage.

Feature F6. Situation setting means (function for executing the process of step S3605 in the main MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment) for setting an advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantageous transition means for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state (pseudo-bonus state ST4) that is advantageous to the player (main-side MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment executes the processing of step S3803 in the fifth embodiment. function) and
Based on the fact that the advantageous shift possible state is set, the expected state at the start (first CZ state ST6) is set to the expected state at the start (the processing of step S3606 in the main MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment is executed function) and
with
A game characterized in that the expected state at the start is more likely to transition to the advantageous game state than a predetermined game state (normal game state ST1) which is the state in which the expected state at the start is not the state in which the expected state at the start is the state in which the expected transition is possible. machine.

According to the feature F6, when the advantageous shift possible state is newly set, the expected state at the start is set so as to easily shift to the advantageous gaming state. As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the new setting of the advantageous transition possible state.

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein the predetermined gaming state is entered when no transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the expected state at start.

According to the feature F7, even if the transition to the advantageous game state does not occur in the expected state at the start, the game state is set to the predetermined game state. It is possible to

Feature F8. a winning lottery means for executing a winning lottery process in each game (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72);
Correspondence control execution means (function of executing the processing of steps S309 and S310 in the main side MPU 72) for executing the control corresponding to the winning on the basis of the establishment of the winning corresponding to the winning combination in the winning lottery process and,
with
Characteristic feature F6 or F7, characterized in that the situation setting means sets the situation to the situation in which the advantageous transition is possible based on the winning of any combination in the lottery process for the combination in the situation where the situation is not in the situation in which the advantageous transition is possible. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature F8, the advantageous transition possible state is set based on the winning of any combination in the lottery process of the combination in the situation where the advantageous transition possible state is not established, so the advantageous transition possible state is set to the advantageous transition possible state. It becomes possible to cause the transition to the transitionable state at an early stage.

For the configuration of features F1 to F8, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of H10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets the game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern display for controlling the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is regarded as establishment of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination. Winning response control means for executing corresponding control (function for executing the processes of steps S309 and S310 in the main MPU 72);
In a game machine equipped with
A special winning combination (index value IV=10) is set as a winning winning combination in the winning lottery process,
When the special role is won, the pattern display control means controls the first stop result (first bell winning (combination of symbols corresponding to ) can be displayed, and when the special combination is won, the stop operation means is operated in the second stop mode (first stop of the right reel 32R). Allowing the second stop result (combination of symbols corresponding to special bell winning) to be displayed,
In this gaming machine, when the special combination is won during a predetermined waiting period (transition waiting period) during which a predetermined profit (pseudo-bonus state ST4) is awarded after a predetermined number of games have been completed, the second stop mode. A special notification control means (main MPU 72 in the A game machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S2307 and S2308, and a function of executing the processing of step S2504 in the effect-side MPU 92).

According to feature G1, when winning a special combination in a predetermined waiting period in which a predetermined profit is awarded after a predetermined number of games have been played, the stop operation means should be operated in the second stop mode. A special announcement is made that the player can recognize. Then, when the stop operation means is operated in the second stop mode, the second stop result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the predetermined profit is about to be given by using the result of stopping the pattern display means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G2. Even if the second stop result is displayed during the predetermined waiting period, the predetermined waiting period is continued without giving the predetermined profit until the predetermined number of games is completed during the predetermined waiting period. The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized by:

According to the feature G2, even if the second stop result is displayed during the predetermined waiting period, the predetermined waiting period continues without giving the predetermined profit until the predetermined number of games are played during the predetermined waiting period. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the predetermined profit is about to be given by using the result of stopping the pattern display means without affecting the timing of giving the predetermined profit.

Feature G3. The special notification control means is characterized in that, when the second stop result is displayed during the predetermined waiting period, the special notification is not executed even if the special role is won again during the predetermined waiting period. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2.

According to the feature G3, when the second stop result is displayed during the predetermined waiting period, even if the special combination is won again, the special notification is not executed, thereby recognizing that the predetermined profit is already approaching. It is possible to prevent the special notification from being excessively executed for the player who is playing.

Feature G4. The special notification control means, when the second stop result is not displayed in response to the fact that the special award is won and the special notification is executed during the predetermined waiting period, the special award is displayed during the predetermined waiting period. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics G1 to G3, wherein the special notification is executed again when the game is won again.

According to the feature G4, when the second stop result is not displayed for the execution of the special notification during the predetermined waiting period, when the special combination is won again during the predetermined waiting period, the special notification is displayed again. executed. This makes it possible to increase the chances that the second stop result is displayed during the predetermined waiting period.

Feature G5. Means for executing a predetermined notification indicating that the predetermined profit is given when the predetermined waiting period has passed without winning the special role (executing the processing of step S2510 in the production side MPU 92 function).

According to the feature G5, when the special role is not won in the predetermined waiting period, a predetermined notification is executed indicating that a predetermined profit is given, so even if the special role is not won in the predetermined waiting period It is possible to make the player recognize that a predetermined profit is also awarded.

Feature G6. When the special combination is won in a situation other than the predetermined waiting period, a predetermined notification (the first stop of the left reel 32L) is made to allow the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in the first stop mode. notification of what to do) is executed (the function of executing the processing of steps S2309 and S2310 in the main side MPU 72, the function of executing the processing of step S2502 in the effect side MPU 92). The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G5.

According to the feature G6, when the special role is won in a situation other than the predetermined waiting period, the predetermined notification is executed so that the player can recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in the first stop mode. If the special role is won in a situation other than the predetermined waiting period, the first stop result will be displayed. Therefore, the second stop result is displayed during the predetermined waiting period, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the display of the second stop result.

Feature G7. As the predetermined profit, a first predetermined profit (first pseudo-bonus state) in which the player's profit is relatively high, and a second predetermined profit (second pseudo-bonus state) in which the player's profit is relatively low. , is set and
When the second stop result is displayed during the predetermined waiting period in a situation where the first predetermined profit is awarded after the predetermined waiting period ends, the pattern display control means displays the predetermined stopping result ("red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "red 7" symbol combination) is displayed, and the second predetermined profit is awarded after the predetermined standby period is over. When the second stop result is displayed during the predetermined waiting period, the pattern display means displays a specific stop result ("BAR" pattern, "BAR" pattern, combination of "BAR" pattern) thereafter. The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, characterized by controlling the

According to feature G7, when the second stop result is displayed during the predetermined waiting period in a situation where the first predetermined profit is awarded after the predetermined waiting period ends, the predetermined stop result is displayed after that. The pattern display means is controlled so that when the second stop result is displayed during the predetermined waiting period in a situation where the second predetermined profit is given after the predetermined waiting period ends, the specific stop result is displayed after that. Then, the pattern display means is controlled. As a result, the player can determine which of the first predetermined profit and the second predetermined profit will be awarded by using the stop result without preparing the combinations corresponding to the first predetermined profit and the second predetermined profit. can be recognized by

For the configuration of features G1 to G7, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of H10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. Advantageous transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S2203, S2206 and S2213 in the main side MPU 72) for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state (pseudo bonus state ST4) advantageous to the player;
Add-on means for executing add-on processing for increasing the number of games to be executed until the advantageous game state ends in the advantageous game state (step S2603 to step S2616 and step S2703 to step in the main side MPU 72 a function to execute the processing of S2708);
with
The add-on means can execute the add-on process in a target game (a game in which the number of bets is "3" without being in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3). A game machine characterized in that the above-mentioned addition processing is not executed in a state ST2, a second CB state ST3, a game in which the number of bets is "2".

According to the feature H1, the number of games to be played increases until the advantageous game state ends by executing the additional processing in the advantageous game state. Therefore, the player expects that the add-on process will be executed in the advantageous game state. In this case, the additional processing can be executed in the target game, but the additional processing is not executed in the non-target game. This makes it possible to impose certain restrictions on situations in which the add-on processing can be executed.

Feature H2. A game can be started when a predetermined number (“2” or “3”) of game media is set to bet,
the target game is a game in which a first predetermined number (“3”) of game media out of the predetermined number is bet set;
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the non-target game is a game in which a second predetermined number (“2”) of the predetermined number of game media is set to bet.

According to the feature H2, the add-on process can be executed in the game in which the first predetermined number of game media is bet set, whereas in the game in which the second predetermined number of game media is bet set, Add-on processing is not executed. As a result, the game can be played in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are basically bet set.

Feature H3. Characteristic feature H2 characterized in that a game in which the first predetermined number of game media is bet set is more advantageous to the player than a game in which the second predetermined number of game media is bet set. The game machine described.

According to feature H3, in the configuration in which the game in which the first predetermined number of game media is bet set is more advantageous to the player than the game in which the second predetermined number of game media is bet set, In a game in which a predetermined number of game media is set to bet, an add-on process can be executed, but in a game in which a second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, an add-on process is not executed. As a result, by executing a game in which the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet in order to create an advantageous situation, the additional processing can be automatically executed.

Feature H4. The gaming machine according to feature H2 or H3, wherein the first predetermined number is greater than the second predetermined number.

According to the feature H4, it is possible to increase the number of game media required for executing the additional processing.

Feature H5. The add-on means is capable of executing the add-on process in the target game during the add-on period of the advantageous gaming state (add-on period),
This gaming machine has update means (the process of step S2708 in the main side MPU 72) that executes update processing for bringing closer to the fulfillment of the end condition of the additional period based on the execution of the target game during the additional period. function),
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the updating means does not execute the updating process even if the non-target game is executed during the additional period.

According to the feature H5, even if the non-target game is executed during the additional period, the additional processing is not executed, and when the non-target game is executed during the additional period, the additional period itself does not progress. As a result, even if a non-target game is accidentally executed during the additional period, the additional period progresses even though the additional processing is not executed for it. It is possible to prevent

Feature H6. Provided with a period corresponding effect control means (a function of executing the effect side additional period processing in the effect side MPU 92) that allows the period corresponding effect to be executed in the additional period,
Characteristic feature H5 characterized in that the period-corresponding effect control means advances the period-corresponding effect regardless of whether the target game is executed or the non-target game is executed during the additional period. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature H6, since the period corresponding effect is executed in the additional period, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the additional period. In this case, when the non-target game is executed during the additional period, the progress of the additional period is stopped, whereas the progress of the period corresponding effect is continued. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the non-target game is executed during the additional period.

Feature H7. When the non-target game is executed during the additional period, the period-corresponding effect is progressed while the update process is not executed in the non-target game, so that it is faster than the game in which the additional period ends. The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the effect corresponding to the period is ended in the previous game.

According to the feature H7, when the non-target game is executed during the additional period, the update process is not executed in the non-target game, but the period corresponding effect is progressed, thereby ending the additional period. The period corresponding production is ended in the game before the game. As a result, even if the non-target game is executed in the additional period, the period corresponding effect corresponding to the predetermined number of games can be executed.

Feature H8. In the event that the addition processing is executed while the addition period continues even after the period-corresponding performance is finished, the player is not notified of the profit given in the addition processing. The gaming machine according to characterizing feature H7.

According to the feature H8, if the additional processing is executed when the additional period continues even after the period corresponding effect is completed, the profit that is given in the additional processing is the game. person is not notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity because the effect corresponding to the period has already ended and the additional period has ended.

Feature H9. The add-on means reliably executes the add-on process when the target game is executed during the add-on period,
When the non-target game is executed in a situation where the period-corresponding effect is being executed, the period-corresponding effect control means provides the lowest profit among profits to be given in the add-on process. The game machine according to any one of features H6 to H8, characterized in that a notification indicating is executed.

According to the characteristic H9, since the additional processing is executed each time the target game is executed during the additional period, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the additional period. In this case, if the non-target game is executed in a situation where the effect corresponding to the period is being executed, even though the additional processing is not actually executed, the minimum profit to be given in the additional processing A notification indicating that the benefit of has been given is executed. As a result, while giving the player the impression that the additional processing will be executed in each game during the additional period, the fact that a profit larger than the profit actually given during the additional period is given is executed. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Feature H10. Situation setting means (function for executing the processing of step S1805 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2),
The advantageous transition means shifts the game state to the advantageous game state when the advantageous transition possible state exists,
In the game machine, the situation ending means (in the main MPU 72) terminates the advantageous transition possible situation based on the fact that the situation ending condition is satisfied in the advantageous transition possible situation (the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied). function to execute the process of step S1914),
When the situation end condition is satisfied in the situation where the advantageous transition is possible and the advantageous gaming state is established, not only the advantageous transition possible situation but also the advantageous gaming state is terminated,
Any of the characteristics H1 to H9, characterized in that a process for bringing the situation end condition closer to being satisfied is executed regardless of whether the target game or the non-target game is executed in the advantageous shift possible situation. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature H10, the additional processing is not executed when the non-target game is executed, but the processing for bringing the situation end condition closer to being satisfied is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of disadvantage of executing a non-target game.

For the configuration of features H1 to H10, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of H10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to each feature group of the feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, the feature group D, the feature group E, the feature group F, the feature group G, and the feature group H, It is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , is fired toward the game area according to the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: The rotation of the rotating body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the rotating body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player responds to the pattern after the stop. A game machine that gives benefits to

10... Slot machine 31... Reel unit 41... Start lever 42 to 44... Stop button 72... Main side MPU 74... Main side RAM 74c... Continuing game number counter 74d... Total winning number counter 92... MPU on the production side, SC2: Second section, ST1: Normal game state, ST4: Pseudo-bonus state, ST6: First CZ state, ST7: Second CZ state.

Claims (1)

Advantageous transition means for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player;
addition means for executing an addition process for increasing the number of games to be played until the advantageous gaming state ends in the advantageous gaming state;
with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the addition means can execute the addition processing in the target game and does not execute the addition processing in the non-target game.

Images